Handleiding Jeep Renegade - 2016 (pagina 643 van 688) (Engels)

617844

643

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/688

Pagina verder

Renegade

OWNER’S MANUAL

2016 Renegade

First Edition Rev 1

Printed in U.S.A.

16BU-126-AA

Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

2016

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .........................................................9

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................19

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . ............................................27

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . .................................177

SAFETY .....................................................................237

STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................317

INCASEOFEMERGENCY .......................................................433

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE ....................................519

TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................595

MULTIMEDIA................................................................603

INDEX .....................................................................665

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 INTRODUCTION ........................4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............5

䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............7

䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7

䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING ...................7

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC

vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-

ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials

that are traditional to our vehicles.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and

perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not

intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from

many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take

time to become familiar with your vehicle.

The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed

for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road

driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a

four-wheel drive vehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s

Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,

particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-

sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle

handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills

will improve with experience. When driving off-road or

working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect

the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.

Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws

wherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a

collision. Refer to “Driving Tips/Off-Road Driving Tips”

in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

4 INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various

customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it

should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-

ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained

technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about

your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against

operating procedures that could result in a collision or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss

important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-

tions.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher

ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than

many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing

better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven

in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.

Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is

out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles

may not.

INTRODUCTION 7

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle

control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result

in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal

injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-

vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the

U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing

seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or

more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by

two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

Rollover Warning Label

8 INTRODUCTION

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE

FOR YOUR VEHICLE ....................11

▫ Prepare For The Appointment .............11

▫ Prepare A List .........................11

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............11

䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............11

▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............12

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ..........12

▫ In Mexico Contact ......................13

▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands .........13

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ..............13

▫ Service Contract .......................13

䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............15

䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............15

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. .15

▫ In Canada ...........................15

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............16

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .........17

▫ Treadwear ...........................17

▫ Traction Grades........................17

▫ Temperature Grades ....................18

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have

the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 11

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-

cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426-5337

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

12 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 13

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,

or other reproductive harm.

14 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC

warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),

or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 15

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-

mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-

ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,

and/or components is written in straightforward lan-

guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-

ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests

and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-

quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included

are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-

cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety

tips.

16 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal

safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 17

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

18 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTENTS

䡵 FRONT VIEW ..........................20

▫ Front View (Trailhawk) ..................21

䡵 REAR VIEW ...........................22

▫ Rear View (Trailhawk) ...................23

䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................24

䡵 INTERIOR.............................25

FRONT VIEW

Front View

1 — Headlights

2 — Engine Compartment

3 — Windshield

4 — Doors

5 — Exterior Mirrors

6 — Wheels

20 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Front View (Trailhawk)

1 — Headlights

2 — Engine Compartment

3 — Windshield

4 — Doors

5 — Exterior Mirrors

6 — Wheels

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 21

REAR VIEW

Rear View

1 — Rear Lights

2 — Rear Windshield Wiper

3 — Liftgate

22 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rear View (Trailhawk)

1 — Rear Lights

2 — Rear Windshield Wiper

3 — Liftgate

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 23

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel

1 — Headlight Switch

2—AirVents

3 — Instrument Cluster

4 — Multifunction Lever

5 — Windshield Wiper Lever

6—AirVents

7 — Hand Grip

8 — Glove Compartment

9 — Steering Wheel

24 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTERIOR

Interior Features

1 — Seats

2 — Power Window Switches

3 — Transmission Shift Lever (Automatic/Manual options)

4 — Selec Terrain Mode Knob — If Equipped

5 — Climate Controls

6 — Switch Panel

7 — Uconnect Radio

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 KEYS ................................31

▫ Key Fob With Remote Control .............31

䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .....................41

▫ Operation ............................41

䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED ..........................45

▫ Remote Start Cancel Message —

If Equipped ..........................46

▫ How To Use Remote Start ................46

▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............47

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving

The Vehicle ..........................48

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive

The Vehicle...........................48

▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems —

If Equipped ..........................48

▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer

Activation — If Equipped ................49

▫ General Information ....................49

䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................50

▫ General Information ....................51

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ..............51

▫ To Arm The System ....................52

▫ To Disarm The System ...................53

▫ Disabling ............................54

䡵 DOORS ..............................54

▫ Manual Door Locks .....................54

▫ Central Lock/Unlock....................56

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go ....................58

▫ Child Locks ..........................65

䡵 SEATS ...............................66

▫ Manual Front Seats .....................67

▫ Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped .....69

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped...............71

▫ Rear Seats............................72

䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS .....................78

▫ Front Head Restraints ...................79

▫ Rear Head Restraints ....................80

䡵 STEERING WHEEL ......................81

▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...........81

▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .......82

䡵 MIRRORS .............................83

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................83

▫ Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ........84

▫ Outside Mirrors .......................85

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............87

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —

IF EQUIPPED ..........................87

▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) ..................93

▫ Mode Of Operation .....................94

▫ Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings .......95

▫ General Information ....................96

䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ......................97

▫ Headlights ...........................97

▫ Automatic Lighting — If Equipped .........98

▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —

If Equipped ..........................98

▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........99

▫ Parking Lights ........................99

▫ Headlight Delay .......................99

▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................100

▫ High Beams .........................101

▫ Turn Signals .........................101

䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .....................102

▫ Front Lights .........................102

▫ Interior Lights Dimmer Switch ............107

䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS .................108

▫ Front Wiper Operation ..................108

▫ Rear Wiper Operation ..................111

▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ....113

䡵 WINDOWS ...........................114

▫ Power Windows ......................114

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................117

▫ Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations —

Passenger Compartment .................117

▫ Manual Climate Controls — If Equipped .....119

▫ Automatic Climate Controls — If Equipped . .123

䡵 MY SKY SUN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........136

▫ Removable Roof — IF Equipped ..........136

▫ Power My Sky — If Equipped ............137

▫ Removing And Installing Panels ...........139

▫ Bag For Housing Panels — If Equipped ......145

▫ Emergency Open/Close .................148

䡵 HOOD ..............................150

䡵 LIFTGATE ...........................152

▫ Opening ............................152

▫ Closing.............................155

▫ Cargo Area Features....................156

䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .................163

▫ Glove Compartment ...................163

▫ Sun Visors ..........................164

▫ Power Outlets .......................166

▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped ............168

▫ Cigar Lighter — Optional................169

▫ Ashtray — Optional....................170

▫ Front Armrest .......................171

▫ Cupholders .........................172

▫ Handle Grip .........................173

䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .174

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or

keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system

consists of a Key Fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The

keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless

Ignition Node (KIN).

Key Fob With Remote Control

The Key Fob with Remote Control contains a Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE system allows

you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the

Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20

m) using a handheld Key Fob with a RKE transmitter.

The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the

vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the LOCK button is

disabled. Only the UNLOCK button is enabled.

Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go

Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle

Key

The Key Fob With Remote Control contains the RKE

transmitter with an integrated vehicle key. To use the

vehicle key, simply push the vehicle key release button.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob Emergency Key Release

A — Emergency Key Release Button

B — Emergency Key

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

The driver’s door may be unlocked by inserting the

vehicle key into the exterior driver’s door lock cylinder.

To unlock all the doors, push the interior door unlock

button on the door panel.

Integrated Vehicle Key

1 — Vehicle Key

2 — Vehicle Key Release Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the

unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also

turn on.

1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, refer to “Uconnect SETTINGS” in “Mul-

timedia” for further information.

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,

refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

If equipped, the doors may be locked by inserting the

vehicle key into the exterior driver’s door lock cylinder.

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights

will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the

signal. Settings in radio can change to lights only, chirp

only, or both.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle

Key

If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the

doors will lock. This is signaled by a quick flash of the

turn signals.

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go

If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the

doors will lock. The doors will unlock again only if the

key is inside the passenger compartment.

NOTE:

• The current setting can be changed within the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) menu or in

the Uconnect Settings so that the system will allow/

inhibit the ability to lock the doors when one or more

of them are open.

• For more information, refer to “Multi-Functional Dis-

play (EVIC)” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel,” subsection “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/ Driver Information Display (DID),” or

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”

Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With

Remote Control

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back

housing or the printed circuit board.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

Key Fob With Remote Control

1. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if

equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the

RKE transmitter apart using a screwdriver or similar

tool. Make sure not to damage the seal during re-

moval.

Integrated Vehicle Key Battery Removal

A — RKE Transmitter

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a

solid surface such as a table or similar surface. Then,

replace the battery.

When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the

battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,

located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new

battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery

deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing

alcohol.

Integrated Vehicle Key Battery Removal

B — Battery

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

Separating Keyless Enter-N-Go Transmitter Case

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical

latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways

with your thumb. Then, pull the key out with your

other hand.

2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if

equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the

RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make

sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Separating Keyless Enter-N-Go Transmitter Case

A — RKE Transmitter

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a

solid surface such as a table or similar surface. Then,

replace the battery.

When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the

battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,

located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new

battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery

deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing

alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two

halves together and insert the emergency key.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Battery Replacement

B — Battery

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

Request For Additional Key Fobs

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it

cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

always remember to place the ignition in the OFF

position.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided

with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).

Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is

required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a

blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob

is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System

serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized

dealer.

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SWITCH

Operation

Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or

keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system

consists of a Key Fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The

keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless

Ignition Node (KIN).

Models With Integrated Vehicle Key

The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an

ignition switch. It has three operating positions, two with

detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-

tions are STOP/OFF, MAR/RUN, and AVV/START. The

AVV/START position is a spring-loaded momentary

contact position. When released from the AVV/START

position, the switch automatically returns to the MAR/

RUN position.

1 — STOP/OFF

• The engine is stopped.

• The key can be removed from the IGNM.

• The steering column can be locked (with the ignition

key removed).

Ignition Node Module (IGNM)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

• Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)

are still available.

2 — MAR/RUN

• Driving position.

• Electrical devices are available.

3 — AVV/START

• Start the engine.

The ignition switch is provided with a safety mechanism.

If the engine fails to start, the ignition should be returned

to the STOP/OFF position prior to repeating the starting

procedure.

On models equipped with an automatic transmission, the

ignition key is only removable when the shift lever is in

PARK (P).

Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition

switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger

compartment.

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has three oper-

ating positions. The three positions are STOP, RUN, and

START.

NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the

push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may

have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up

method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put

the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the

Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and

push to operate the ignition switch.

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The KIN can be placed in the following positions:

STOP

• The engine is stopped.

• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm,

etc.) are still available.

RUN

• Driving position.

• All the electrical devices are available.

START

• Start the engine.

NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the FOBIK is located

inside the cargo area AND the liftgate is opened.

START/STOP Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. A

child could operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove key from the ignition and lock all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting the

Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-

niently from outside the vehicle while still

maintaining security. The system has a range of

246 ft (75 m).

The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate

Control and (if equipped) the optional heated seats and

optional heated steering wheel depending on tempera-

tures outside and inside the car.

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic

transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter

may reduce this range.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the instrument

cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote

start prematurely:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open

• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold

• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired

The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in

the MAR/RUN position.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the

engine will remote start:

• Shift Lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Liftgate closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• RKE PANIC button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• Ignition in STOP/OFF position

• Fuel level meets minimum requirement

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-

jury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls

could cause serious injury or death.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the REMOTE START button

on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-

onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn

signals will flash, and the horn will chirp twice.

Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in

the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window operation is disabled

when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or

allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system

will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START

button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote

Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the

doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,

for vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go fea-

ture push and release the START/STOP button; for

vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go feature

put the key in RUN position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-

N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push

Start Button” will display in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Dispay

(DID) until you push the START button.

NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless

Enter-N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —

Key to RUN” will display in the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) until you put the key in RUN

position.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering

wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically

turn on in cold weather. These features will stay on

through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition

switch is cycled to the MAR/RUN position.

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-

vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For

more information on Remote Start Comfort System op-

eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer

Activation — If Equipped

When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient

temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield

Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will

resume previous operation, except if the Windshield

Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer

timer and operation will continue.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button

Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized

vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are

programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and

operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine

to crank if an invalid Key Fob tries to start the engine.

After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, if

there is a problem with the system, the Vehicle Security

Light will turn on. This condition will result in the engine

being shut off after two seconds.

Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as

possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

• Do not make modifications or alterations to the

immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to

the immobilization system may result in a loss of

security protection.

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-

tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and loss of security protection.

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors

for unauthorized entry and if the ignition switch is cycled

to the ON/RUN position without a valid key. While the

Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for

door locks and liftgate release are disabled.

If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will provide the following audible and visible

signals:

• Horn will pulse.

• Park lamps and/or turn signals will flash.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51

• Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will

flash.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the STOP/

OFF position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Start-

ing And Operating⬙ for further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

make sure the vehicle ignition system is STOP/OFF,

and the key is physically removed from the ignition.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the

vehicle:

• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch

with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry

Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the

Vehicle Security Light Location

A — Vehicle Security Light

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

same exterior zone (for further information, refer to

⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your

Vehicle”).

• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

NOTE:

• If a second chime is heard after approximately four

seconds from arming the alarm, disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK button. Check for the correct

closure of doors and liftgate, then reactivate the

system by following steps 1 and 2.

• If a second chime is heard after approximately four

seconds from arming the alarm, even with the doors

and liftgate properly closed, a fault may have oc-

curred during the arming operation. If this occurs,

contact your authorized dealer.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of

the following methods:

• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a

valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if

equipped). Refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Getting

To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the STOP/OFF

position.

– For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button

(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).

– For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn

the key to the MAR/RUN position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm

the Vehicle Security Alarm.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior

power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle

and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery

becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected.

Disabling

To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long

inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the vehicle

key in the exterior door lock cylinder.

NOTE: If the batteries in the RKE transmitter discharge

in the event of a failure to the system, or to switch off the

alarm, place the ignition in the MAR/RUN position.

DOORS

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, rotate the door lock button on each

door trim panel forward. To unlock the doors, pull the

inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door

lock button until the lock symbol is no longer visible.

If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the

door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not

inside the vehicle before closing the door.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside

With the doors closed, insert the key blade into the driver

exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the right to lock

the driver’s door.

To unlock the driver’s door, insert the key blade into the

driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the left to

unlock the driver’s door.

NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual

door separately.

Manual Door Lock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of a

collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsu-

pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause se-

vere personal injuries or death.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the RUN mode. A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

Central Lock/Unlock

A power door lock switch is located on each of the front

door trim panels. This switch is used to lock or unlock the

doors and liftgate.

Locking/Unlocking From The Inside

Push the button on the driver or passenger door trim

panel to lock the doors.

With the doors locked, push the button to unlock the

doors.

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the

Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system if equipped.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

The power locks will continue to operate while the

ignition is in the MAR/RUN and STOP/OFF position. If

a door is open, and the ignition is in the MAR/RUN

position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the

key.

NOTE: If all of the doors are closed properly, the door

locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed

exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). Refer to “Uconnect SET-

TINGS” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Power Door Lock Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

Keyless Enter-N-Go

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a

feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to

lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to

push the RKE transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. Refer to

“Uconnect SETTINGS” in “Multimedia” for further

information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-

sponse time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door

Handle, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the

vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm

will arm.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver

door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,

all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front

driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to

“Uconnect SETTINGS” in “Multimedia” for further in-

formation.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front

passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the

liftgate automatically.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger

door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door

unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door

handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all

four doors.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door

handle LOCK button. This could unlock the door(s).

NOTE: The Passive Entry system will not operate if the

RKE transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock

button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door

unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch

is in the OFF position.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.

There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe

search in any Passive Entry vehicle:

1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitter while a door is open.

2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door

handle while a door is open.

3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while

the door is open.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors

are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it

finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and

it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters

outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the

customer.

NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a

valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the

vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is

detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock

the doors when any of the following conditions are met:

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock

knobs.

• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside

the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive

Entry door handle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the

electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the

Electronic Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft

(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry LOCK

button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.

NOTE: The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock

the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock feature is

built into the Electronic Liftgate release.

Liftgate Release/Passive Entry

A — Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location

B — Electronic Liftgate Lock/Liftgate Passive Lock Location

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in

EVIC/DID, if equipped, only the liftgate will unlock

when you push the Electronic Release. If ⬙Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate

will unlock when you push the electronic lock/unlock

button on the liftgate. For further information, refer to

“Uconnect SETTINGS” in “Multimedia.”

Emergency Unlocking Driver Door

If the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is

low or dead, the emergency key can be used to unlock the

driver side door lock cylinder.

To release the emergency key, proceed as follows:

1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side.

2. Remove the emergency key from the Key Fob with

Remote Control housing.

NOTE: The Emergency Key can be inserted into the door

lock cylinder from either direction.

Emergency Key Release

1 — Emergency Key Release Button

2 — Emergency Key

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

severely injured or killed. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake

pedal, or the gear selector. Do not leave the Key Fob

in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle

equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go in the MAR/

RUN mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate

power windows, other controls, or move the ve-

hicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause them to be severely injured or killed.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Child Locks

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade

screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the

LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door

is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the

outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the

unlocked position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65

NOTE:

• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can

only be opened by using the outside door handle even

though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock

system, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-

tem, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate

the lock button to the unlocked position, roll down the

window, and open the door with the outside door

handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Manual Front Seats

Manual Seat Adjustment Levers

1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar

2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever

3 — Recline Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment

On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting

bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the

seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have

reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,

move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that

the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could

cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be

adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust

the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use

the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Height Adjustment

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by

using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.

Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push

downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Recline Adjustment

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired

position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift

the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped

The power seat controls are located on the outboard side

of the seat, close to the floor.

Use the switch to move the seat up/down, forward/

rearward, tilt if equipped and to set the angle of the

seatback.

Power Seat Switches

1 — Power Seat Switch

2 — Power Recline Switch

3 — Power Lumbar Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69

Forward Or Rearward Adjustment

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when the desired position has been reached.

Height Adjustment

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat

will move in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when the desired position is reached.

Recline Adjustment

Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the

seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Tilt Adjustment

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or

down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of

the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in

the direction of the switch.

Power Lumbar Adjustment

Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or

decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or

downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Seats — If Equipped

The heated seat switches are located on the instrument

panel.

You can choose between two heating levels:

• Push the heated seat button

once to turn the HI

setting ON.

• Push the heated seat button

a second time to turn

the LO setting ON.

• Push the heated seat button

a third time to turn

the heating elements OFF.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-

matically switch to LO-level after approximately 145

minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis-

play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.

The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after

approximately 60 minutes.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats

to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

Vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the heated seats

can be programed to come on during a Remote Start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for

further information.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with Auto on Comfort, turning on the

car the driver’s heated seat will automatically turn ON

when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must exercise care

when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-

ture of the seat.

Rear Seats

The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat which

increases the storage of the rear cargo area.

NOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary

to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Be

sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-

tioned forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold

down easily.

• Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure the rear

armrest in up position.

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Removing Shelf — If Equipped

Proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect the two links that support the shelf at the

eyelets.

2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.

3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and then

remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.

Rear Shelf Support Links

1 — Links

2 — Eyelets

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73

4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or

behind the front seatbacks.

Adjusting The Rear Shelf

Rear Shelf Pin

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Partial Enlargement Of Cargo Area

Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you

to carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear

seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you to

carry two passengers.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).

2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.

3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat

and rest them on the seat belt guide.

4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right

rear seatback completely forward.

Rear Seat Release

1 — Seatback Release Lever

2 — Seat Belt Guide

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75

Cargo Area Enlargement

Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional

storage in the rear cargo area.

Proceed as follows:

1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.

2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat.

3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of the

rear seatbacks completely forward.

Seatback Repositioning

NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the

seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty

returning the seat to its proper position.

1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the top

edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks properly latch.

2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock

on both the latches. Verify the red notches are no

longer visible on the release lever. If the red notches

are visible, the seatback is not secure.

Rear Seat Latch

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40

Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the rear armrest

tab to release it from the seat and pull forward.

The center part of the rear seat can also be used as rear

armrest with cupholders.

Rear Seat Center Armrest — If Equipped

Rear Armrest

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper stability

for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-

pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted

or removed could cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and passenger

head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and

push downward on the head restraint.

NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by

qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either

of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-

rized dealer.

Head Restraint Adjustment Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-

pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted

or removed could cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

Rear Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with 2 outboard head restraints

and 1 center head restraint for its rear passengers. The

rear head restraints can be raised or lowered. When the

center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be

in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the

center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maxi-

mum visibility for the driver.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint.

To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,

located at the base of the head restraint, and push

downward on the head restraint.

Adjustment Button

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by

qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either

of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-

rized dealer.

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is

located below the steering wheel at the end of the

steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping

lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering

column, move the steering wheel upward or downward

as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,

pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as

desired.

Tilt Steering Wheel Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81

To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/

telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow

this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps

warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering

wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated

steering wheel switch

has been turned on, it will

operate for up to 100 minutes before automatically

shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off

early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is

already warm. The heated steering wheel control

button is located on the center of the instrument panel

below the radio screen.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with Auto on Comfort, turning on the

car the heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON

when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion, or other physical conditions must exercise

care when using the steering wheel heater. It may

cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if

used for long periods.

(Continued)

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering

wheel covers of any type and material. This may

cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The

mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through

the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind

you can be reduced by moving the lever under the mirror

to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The

mirror should be adjusted while the lever under the

mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

NOTE: The mirror will automatically release in the event

of heavy contact with a passenger.

Mirror Adjustment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83

Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or

off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when

the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right

of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is

moving in reverse.

Dimming Mirror

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirrors

Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped

The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door

panel.

To adjust the mirror, push the mirror adjustment switch

in the four directions indicated by arrows.

NOTE:

• To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in

the MAR/RUN position.

• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the

neutral position to avoid accidental movements.

Power Mirror Switch

1 — Mirror Selector Switch

2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85

Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped

To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners of the

mirrors till desired alignment is obtained.

Folding Mirror

The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to

pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The

mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal

and full rearward.

Manual Adjustment Mirror

Folding Exterior Mirror

86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the

Rear Window Defroster.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-

based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to

detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,

motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the

rear/front/side of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will

momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors

to let the driver know that the system is operational. The

BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any

forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode

when the vehicle is in PARK.

Rear Detection Zones

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane

width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone

length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi-

mately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.

The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both

sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert

the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about

rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-

tection zones.

• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to

deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to

avoid a misdetection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” for further information.

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are

located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road

contamination so that the BSM system can function

properly. Do not block the radar sensors located on the

rear fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle

racks, etc.).

Rear Sensor Locations

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the

detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light

located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an

audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.

Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three

different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to

see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an

alert during these types of zone entries.

BSM Warning Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either

side of the vehicle.

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either

side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative

speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring

90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed

less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in

the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning

light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed

between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph

(25 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking/Passing

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on

stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,

berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert

on such objects. This is normal operation and your

vehicle does not require service.

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are

traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in

adjacent lanes.

Stationary Objects

Opposing Traffic

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to

help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM

system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-

clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with the BSM system, always check your vehicles

mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn

signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can

result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the

driver when backing out of parking spaces where their

vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed

slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the

rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will

then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an

oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of

the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of

the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately

1 mph (2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot

situations.

RCP Detection Zones

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can

be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the

sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the

system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the

driver is alerted using both the visual and audible

alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be

used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a

parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when

backing up, even when using RCP. Always check

carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and

be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other

vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-

ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or

death.

Mode Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-

timedia” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM

system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side

view mirror based on a detected object. However, when

the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,

the system will respond with both visual and audible

alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an

audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,

the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-

priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the

turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an

94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime

will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-

tected object are present on the same side at the same

time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In

addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be

muted.

NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the

BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with

both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is

present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio

is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the

RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no

visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP

systems.

NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating

mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle

is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and

used.

Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings

Sensor Blinded

In the case of a sensor blinded:

• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continu-

ously.

• A instrument cluster message will display “Blind Spot

Monitoring Unavailable - Wipe Rear Bumper Cor-

ners.”

NOTE: The rear bumper must be clean and free of any

obstructing debris.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95

System Not Available

In the case of the system being temporary unavailable:

• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continu-

ously.

• A instrument cluster message will display “Blind Spot

Monitoring Temporary Unavailable.”

In the case of the system being completely unavailable:

• A chime will turn on.

• A instrument cluster message will display “Blind Spot

Monitoring Unavailable - Service Required.”

NOTE: Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized

dealer for service.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency

that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by

other than an authorized service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlights

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the

instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the

operation of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime

running lights, fog lights and the dimming of the instru-

ment cluster and interior lighting.

Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument

cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.

Headlight Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97

Automatic Lighting — If Equipped

Light Sensor

The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED,

located on the windshield. It detects changes in light

intensity outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of

light set by using the Menu on the display or on the

Uconnect system.

The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of

external light required for controlling the lighting.

Automatic Headlights

Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.

When the automatic headlights are enabled, the head-

light time delay is active. After the ignition switch is

placed in the STOP/OFF position, the headlights will

automatically turn off after the time is set by Uconnect

Settings.

The timing of the headlights is adjustable between 0, 30,

60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” for further information.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights

will come on in the automatic mode.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when

the engine is started and remain on unless the headlights

are turned on or the engine is shut off.

The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal operation

and resume operation when the turn signal operation has

ended.

98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is built into the headlight

switch.

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking

lights or the low beam headlights and push the

fog light button on the headlight switch. To turn off the

front fog lights, push the fog light button on the headlight

switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates

when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam

headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam

headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Parking Lights

Rotate the headlight switch to the parking position to

turn on the parking lights. The parking light indicator in

the cluster will illuminate.

Headlight Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination

for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an

unlit area.

The time delay of the headlights is programmable be-

tween 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99

Headlight Delay Activation

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the

STOP/OFF position while the headlights are still on.

Then, turn off the headlights within two minutes. The

delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned

off from the “Lowbeam” position.

If the headlight switch is in ⬙Auto⬙ position and head-

lights were on before Key OFF, the delay interval begins

automatically.

Headlight Delay Disable

The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the

parking lights or by placing the ignition in the MAR/

RUN position.

If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on,

they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The lights must be turned off within two minutes

of placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position to

activate this feature.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and

remain on until the lever is released.

100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

High Beams

To turn on the high beam headlights, push the turn signal

lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) and an

indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn off the

high beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward (toward

the rear of the vehicle).

NOTE: The headlights must be on for the high beams to

activate.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a

turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will

turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal

is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on

when the turn signal is turned off.

High Beam And Turn Signal Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Front Lights

The courtesy light switches is used to turn the courtesy

lights On/Off.

Courtesy Lights

1 — Drivers Courtesy Lights

Courtesy Light Switches

1— Left Switch

2— Right Switch

102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To operate the courtesy lights, push either the drivers or

passenger light switch.

NOTE:

• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior

lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from

discharging once the doors are closed.

• If a light is left on it will automatically be turned off

after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in

the STOP/OFF position.

Rear Lights

Push the button on the rear dome light once to turn the

light On, the light will remain On at all times. Push the

button a second time to turn the light Off, the lights will

remain Off at all times.

Rear Dome Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103

Vehicles With Retractable Roof

For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are

two interior lights located above the grab handles of the

rear doors.

The lights come on by opening any of the doors.

Rear Interior Light

Interior Light Locations

104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Dome Light Timing

The Dome Light will automatically illuminate when the

doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the

doors are closed.

Timing Entering The Vehicle

The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:

• When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will

illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.

• When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will

illuminate for approximately three minutes.

• When the doors are closed, the dome light will auto-

matically shut off after approximately 10 seconds.

The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the

MAR/RUN or AVV/START position.

The dome light will turn off under any of the following

conditions:

• The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed

in the MAR/RUN or AVV/START position.

• The dome lights will turn off automatically when the

doors are locked.

• The dome lights will automatically turn off after

approximately fifteen minutes of inactivity to preserve

the battery.

Timing Exiting The Vehicle

The dome light will illuminate under the following

conditions when the ignition is turned to the STOP/OFF

position and the key is removed:

• The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the

key is removed from the ignition.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105

• The opening of one of the doors (approximately three

minutes).

• After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).

The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are

locked.

Cargo Area Lights

Two interior lights are located in the cargo area on the

side trim panels.

These lights automatically turn on/off when the liftgate

is opened and closed, regardless of the position of the

ignition.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor.

To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing

the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto-

matically. Closing the mirror cover will turn the light off.

Vanity Mirror

1 — Mirror Light

2 — Mirror Cover

106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Lights Dimmer Switch

Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-

ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-

ent light located in the overhead console, door handle

lights, lower instrument panel lights, door map pocket

lights, and cubby bin lights.

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the

instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward

to increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument

panel. At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer,

all the interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom

most setting of the thumb wheel will turn all the interior

lights to their lowest dimmable setting.

Headlight Switch

1 — Ambient Light Control

2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107

WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the

lever on the right side of the steering column. The front

wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the

end of the lever.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is

turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”

position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Front Wiper Operation

Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two

detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent

for low wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper

operation.

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold

while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the

intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate

Windshield Wiper Stalk

108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and

then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off

position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,

then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Mist

Use this feature when weather conditions make occa-

sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever

upward to the Mist position and release for a single

wiping cycle.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the

windshield. The wash function must be used in order to

spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The

feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multifunction lever to one of the two

detent positions for intermittent settings, to activate this

feature.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109

This function can be activated by the Uconnect Settings

through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in the

“Multimedia” for further information.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least

sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most

sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position

when not using the system.

Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition

When the user switches the ignition to STOP, leaving the

lever in intermittent positions, no wipe cycle is per-

formed for safety reasons. This temporary inhibition

avoids accidental activations of the wiping (e.g during

the hand washing of the windscreen, blocking the blades

in ice/snow conditions). The user can activate the Rain

Sensing Wipers in three ways:

• Moving the level in OFF position and then in Intermit-

tent positions.

• One MIST command actuation.

Rain Sensor

110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and the

rain sensor detects the presence of rain.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly

when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-

shield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off

using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Rear Wiper Operation

The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the lever

on the right side of the steering column. The rear

wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at

the middle of the lever.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to

the first detent for intermittent operation and to

the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.

To use the washer, push the lever forward and

hold while spray is desired. If the lever is

pushed while in the intermittent setting, the

wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe

cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then

resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off

position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,

then turn off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111

NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if

the switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the

lever is released, the pump will resume normal opera-

tion.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned

to the STOP/OFF position, the wiper will automatically

return to the “park” position.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located with

the Climate Controls on the instrument panel.

Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An

indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear

window defroster is on. The rear window defroster

automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.

To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a

second time.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper

De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following

conditions:

• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper

De-Icer will be activated automatically in the case of a

cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and

the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper

De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear

defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is

below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Re-

mote Start is active and the outside ambient tempera-

ture is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper

De-Icer will be enabled. Upon exiting remote start

mode the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain on.

Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield Wiper

De-Icer— If Equipped

Turning On the car, the Rear Window Defroster and

Windshield Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn ON

when the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F

(4.4° C).

The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield Wiper De-

Icer automatically turn off after approximately 20 min-

utes. To manually shut the defroster/windshield off,

push the button a second time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The power window switch is located on the driver’s door

panel. The driver’s power window switch controls the

operation of all the windows.

There are single window controls on each passenger door

trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.

Power Window Switches

1 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front Window

2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear Window (If Equipped)

3 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors)

114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The window controls will operate only when the ignition

is in the MAR/RUN or AVV/START position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power

window switches will remain active for up to three

minutes after the ignition is cycled to the STOP/OFF

position. Opening either front door will cancel this

feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for

further information.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do

not let children play with power windows. Do not

leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

location accessible to children, and do not leave the

ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-

larly unattended children, can become entrapped by

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the windows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

Controls

AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped

The driver and passenger power window switches have

an AUTO-down feature. Push the switch for half a

second and release it, the window will go down auto-

matically.

To partially open the window, push the window switch

and release it when you want the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly

when the when the window has reached the desired

position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115

AUTO-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection — If

Equipped

Lift and hold the window switch for half a second,

release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To partially close the window, lift the window switch and

release it when you want the window to stop.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-

closure, it will reverse direction and then go back

down. Remove the obstacle and use the window

switch again to close the window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger

the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-

closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and

hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no Auto-Reverse protection when the win-

dow is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from

the window before closing.

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window

probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window

completely and continue to hold the switch up for an

additional two seconds after the window is closed.

116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or par-

tially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can

be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

windows open, open the front and rear windows to-

gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger

Compartment

Left Side Air Outlets

1 — Adjustable Air Outlet

2 — Air Vane Adjustment

3 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment

4 — Fixed Air Outlet

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117

Center Air Outlets

1 — Fixed Air Outlet

2 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment

3 — Air Vane Adjustment

4 — Adjustable Air Outlet

Right Side Air Outlets

1 — Fixed Air Outlet

2 — Adjustable Air Outlet

3 — Air Vane Adjustment

4 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment

118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Climate Controls — If Equipped

The Manual Climate Controls consist of a series of rotary

dials with inner push buttons.

1. Blower Control

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced

through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower

speed increases as you move the control clockwise from

the “0” (OFF) position.

2. Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air

inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial

counter-clockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates

cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red

area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotating the Tem-

perature Control all the way counter-clockwise results in

turning on the MAX A/C feature.

Manual Temperature Controls (MTC)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119

3. Mode Control

Rotate this control to change the system between Modes

(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the

instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-

justed to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be ad-

justed so that they are directed toward the rear seat

passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor

outlets.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount flowing through the defrost and

side window demister outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and

side window demister outlets. This setting

works best in cold or snowy conditions that

require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is

good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-

ture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and

side window demister outlets. Use this mode

with maximum blower and temperature settings for

best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix

or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is

not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the

windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes

only when required.

120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn

ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside

mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when

the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window

defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.

5. A/C Button — If Equipped

Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light

will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is

engaged.

6. Recirculation Button

Push this control button to change the system between

recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation

can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,

odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

NOTE:

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp

weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,

because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-

lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for

Defrost.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-

turbing the mode control selection.

Rear Window Defrosting

Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn

the function on/off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121

Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost

indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The

function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.

If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the

defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.

CAUTION!

To avoid causing damage to the rear window de-

froster heating filaments do not affix stickers or other

objects to the inside of the rear glass.

Air Recirculation

Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the

LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended

to turn the internal air recirculation on while standing in

traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-

luted air.

Do not use the function for a long period of time,

particularly if there are many passengers in the vehicle,

to prevent the windows from misting up.

NOTE:

Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach

the required heating or cooling conditions quickly depend-

ing on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air

recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would con-

siderably increase the possibility of the windows misting.

System Maintenance

In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on

at least once a month for approximately 10 minutes.

Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership

before the summer.

NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which

does not pollute the environment in the event of acciden-

tal leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a

(refrigerant) allowed.

122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Climate Controls — If Equipped

1. Driver Temperature Control

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired tempera-

ture shown in the Temperature Display. Rotate fully

counter-clockwise for maximum A/C (LO).

2. A/C Button

Push the A/C Control Button to change the current

setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON.

Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C

operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indi-

cator will turn OFF.

3. MAX Defrost Button

Push the MAX Defrost button to change the current

airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates

when this feature is ON. Performing this function will

cause the automatic climate controls to change to manual

mode. The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs ON)

when MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning

compressor is turned ON (LED ON), both driver and

passenger temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost

mode is selected (LED ON), rear defroster is turned ON

(LED ON) and the air recirculation is turned OFF (LED

Automatic Climate Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123

OFF). If the MAX Defrost mode is turned OFF, the climate

system will return to the previous setting.

4. Blower Control Indicator LEDs

A total of eight LEDs illuminate to visually indicate

blower speeds.

5. Rear Defrost Button

Push the Rear Defrost button to turn ON the rear window

defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).

An indicator will illuminate when the rear window

defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically

turns OFF after 20 minutes.

6. AUTO Button

Pushing this button will automatically control the inte-

rior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution

and amount. Performing this function will cause the

automatic climate controls to change between manual

mode and automatic modes.

7. Passenger Temperature Control

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired tem-

perature shown in the Temperature Display.

NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control

knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Display

Rotate the Passenger Temperature Control dial clockwise

or counter-clockwise to adjust the air temperature in the

front right (Passenger Temperature Control) zone of the

passenger compartment. The set temperature is shown

on the display. Turning the control knob completely in

one direction or the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum

heating) or ⬙LO⬙ (maximum cooling) functions shown in

the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions,

turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature.

124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

9. SYNC Button

Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF.

The Sync indicator will illuminate when this feature is

enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger

temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.

Changing the passenger temperature setting while in

Sync mode will automatically exit this feature and return

to the separate management of air temperatures in the

two zones.

10. Mode Buttons

Airflow distribution modes can be adjusted so air comes

from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, de-mist

outlets and defrost outlets by selecting these buttons.

One, two or all modes may be selected at any one time.

11. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air

forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower

will cause the automatic mode to change to manual

operation. The speeds can be selected by rotating the

Blower Control adjustment knob.

12. ON/OFF Button

Push this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

13. Recirculation Button

Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates

when ON.

NOTE:

• When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button

will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This

indicates that you can not enter to this mode due to

fogging risk.

• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation

indicator is OFF, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode.

If the Recirculation indicator is ON, the Recirculation

setting is manual and Recirculation is ON.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125

14. Driver Temperature Display

Rotate the Driver Temperature Control dial clockwise or

counter-clockwise, to adjust the air temperature in the

front left (Driver Temperature Control) zone of the pas-

senger compartment. The set temperature is shown on

the display. Turning the control knob completely in one

direction or the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heat-

ing) or ⬙LO⬙ (maximum cooling) functions shown in the

display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn

the temperature knob to the desired temperature.

Description

The Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control system regu-

lates the air temperatures in the passenger compartment

in two zones: driver side and passenger side.

The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com-

partment and compensates for possible variations in

external climate conditions.

The Climate Control system can recognize extremely cold

(or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger compart-

ment and provide optimal management of the system’s

capabilities.

NOTE: The reference temperature is 72° F (22° C) for

optimal comfort management.

The automatically controlled functions are:

• Air temperature at the driver/front passenger side

vents.

• Blower speed (continuous variation of the air flow).

• Compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying

the air).

• Air recirculation.

All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat-

ing the system, selecting one or more functions and

modifying their parameters.

126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the

system will only override the settings for safety reasons.

Manual selections always take priority over automatic

ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pushed or

the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons.

The amount of air introduced into the passenger com-

partment is not affected by car speed; it is regulated by

the fan, which is controlled electronically.

The air temperature is always automatically controlled

according to the temperature set on the display (except

for when the system is off or in certain conditions when

the compressor is not running).

The system allows the following to be set or adjusted

manually:

• Driver/passenger side air temperature

• Blower speed (continuous variation)

• Air distribution to seven positions

• Compressor activation

• Rapid defrosting/demisting function

• Air recirculation

• Heated rear window

• System deactivation

NOTE: The Climate Control system detects the passenger

compartment temperature using a temperature sensor,

located in the lower instrument panel between the center

console and the steering wheel.

Turning On The Climate Control System

The Climate Control system can be turned on in different

ways: it is recommended to turn the Temperature Control

knobs to set the desired temperatures and then push the

AUTO button.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127

The system operates automatically to adjust the tempera-

ture, quantity and distribution of the air introduced into

the passenger compartment. It also manages the air

recirculation function and the activation of the air condi-

tioning compressor.

During automatic operation, you can change the set

temperatures, air distribution and blower speed at any

time by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system

will automatically change the settings to adjust to the

new requirements.

During automatic operation (AUTO), varying the air

flow and/or distribution or pushing the A/C control

button causes the AUTO function LED to turn off and the

system to operate in MANUAL mode.

Adjusting The Air Temperature

Rotate the Driver Temperature Control, or the Passenger

Temperature Control, dial clockwise or counter-

clockwise, to adjust the air temperature in the front left

(Driver Temperature Control) or right (Passenger Tem-

perature Control) zone of the passenger compartment.

The set temperatures are shown on the displays.

Push the SYNC button to align the air temperature

between the two zones.

Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return

to the separate management of air temperatures in the

two zones.

Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or

the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heating) or ⬙LO⬙

(maximum cooling) functions respectively.

To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob

to the desired temperature.

128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Air Distribution Selection

By pushing the Mode Control buttons (Defrost/Panel/

Floor buttons), it is possible to set one of the seven

possible air distributions manually by activating one or

more mode buttons:

• Defrost Mode – Air flow to the windshield and front

side window diffusers to defrost them. Use Defrost

mode with maximum temperature settings for best

windshield and side window defrosting.

• Panel Mode – Air flow is distributed between the

central and side instrument panel vents.

• Floor Mode – Air flow is directed from the front and

rear footwell diffusers.

• Floor and Panel Modes – Air flow is distributed

between the footwell diffusers and the central and side

instrument panel vents.

• Floor and Defrost Modes – Air flow distributed be-

tween footwell diffusers and windshield and front side

window defrosting diffusers. This distribution setting

allows the passenger compartment to be warmed

effectively and prevents the windows from misting.

• Defrost and Panel Modes – Air flow distribution

between windshield defrosting diffusers and side and

central instrument panel vents.

• Defrost, Panel and Floor Modes – Air flow distribution

to all the diffusers.

NOTE: Air always flows from the side instrument panel

diffusers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow

by operating the wheel located near the corresponding

vents.

In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically

manages air distribution (LEDs on the Mode Control

buttons are off).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129

When set manually, the air distribution is indicated by

the LEDs on the selected buttons turning on.

In combined function mode, functions are enabled to-

gether with those already set when the relevant button is

pushed. If a button whose function is already active is

pushed, the operation is cancelled and the corresponding

LED turns off.

To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a

manual selection, push the AUTO button.

Adjusting The Fan Speed

Rotate the Blower Control knob to increase/decrease the

fan speed.

The speed is indicated by the eight Blower Control

Indicator LEDs, located above the Blower Control knob,

turning on.

• Maximum blower speed = all LEDs illuminated

• Minimum blower speed = one LED illuminated

The blower can only be turned off if the A/C compressor

has been turned off by pushing the A/C Control button.

NOTE: To restore automatic control of the fan speed after

a manual adjustment, push the AUTO button.

AUTO Button

When the AUTO button is pushed (LED illuminated), the

Climate Control system automatically adjusts the follow-

ing settings in the corresponding zones:

• Quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the

passenger compartment.

• Climate Control system compressor.

• Air Recirculation.

Cancelling all previous manual adjustments.

This is indicated by the AUTO button LED turning on.

130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the AUTO button is pushed when the AUTO LED is on,

the system changes to manual mode; it displays the

current flow and distribution status, which will no longer

be managed automatically.

If a manual adjustment is made to the air distribution, the

A/C button or the blower speed, the LED turns off to

indicate that the system is no longer controlling all

functions automatically.

To restore automatic system control after one or more

manual adjustments, push the AUTO button.

SYNC Button

Push the “SYNC” button (LED illuminated) to correlate

the passenger side air temperature with that of the driver

side.

This function makes temperature regulation easier when

the driver is travelling alone.

Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the

passenger side temperature and return to separate air

temperature management.

Air Recirculation

The Air Recirculation is managed by the following:

• Forced activation (air recirculation always on): indi-

cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button.

• Forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air

intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on the

Recirculation Control button switching off.

Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by push-

ing the Recirculation Control button.

When the On/Off button is pushed, the Climate Control

system automatically activates internal air recirculation

(LED on Recirculation Control button on).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131

In automatic operation, recirculation is managed auto-

matically by the system according to outside environ-

mental conditions.

NOTE:

• Use of the recirculation system makes it possible to

reach the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It

is not recommended to use it on rainy/cold days as it

would considerably increase the possibility of the

windows misting up inside (especially if the Climate

Control system is off). When the outside temperature

is low, recirculation is forced off (air drawn in from the

outside) to prevent the windows from misting up.

• It is not recommended to use internal air recirculation

when the outside temperature is low, since the win-

dows could mist up rapidly.

• When defrost mode is selected recirculation is turned

off to prevent the windows from misting up.

Climate Control System Compressor

Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the

compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the

button turning on).

The system remembers that the compressor has been

turned off, even after the engine has stopped.

Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE (AUTO

LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of com-

pressor, push the AUTO button again.

NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced

to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower

than the outside temperature. Under certain environmen-

tal conditions, windows could mist rapidly since the air

is not dehumidified.

132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling perfor-

mance.

Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob

counter-clockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and pas-

senger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO.

In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be

adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings

will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the

selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost function)

Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the

windshield and side window demisting function.

The Climate Control system carries out the following

operations:

• Turns on the air conditioning compressor when envi-

ronmental conditions are suitable.

• Turns air recirculation off.

• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.

• Directs air flow to windshield and front side window

diffusers.

• Activates the heated rear window defrost.

• Activates the heated windshield (if equipped).

• Displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED

illuminated).

When the function is activated, the AUTO button LED

turns off. With the function activated, the only possible

manual adjustments are pushing the A/C control button,

adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear

window off.

When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are

pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the

Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133

Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield

distribution activates the Climate Control system com-

pressor and the air recirculation is set to ⬙outside air⬙

intake.

This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.

Max-defrost is also available in manual mode.

Rear Window Defrosting

Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn

the function on/off.

Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost

indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The

function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.

If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the

defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.

CAUTION!

To avoid causing damage to the rear window de-

froster heating filaments do not affix stickers or other

objects to the inside of the rear glass.

Turning Off The Climate Control System

Push the ON/OFF button.

With the Climate Control system off:

• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger com-

partment from the outside.

• The A/C compressor is off.

• The blower is off.

• The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated.

134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures

set before the system was turned off and restores them

when one of the following knobs/buttons is pushed:

• A/C

• Recirculation

• Max Defrost

• Blower Increase

• AUTO

To restart the Climate Control system in fully automatic

mode, push the AUTO button.

System Maintenance

In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on

at least once a month for approximately 10 minutes.

Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership

before the summer.

NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which

does not pollute the environment in the event of acciden-

tal leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a

(refrigerant) allowed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135

MY SKY SUN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED

Removable Roof — IF Equipped

The roof consists of front and rear panels that can be

removed independently.

On some vehicles the front panel can be power operated

refer to “Power My Sky” in this section.

My Sky Retractable Roof

My Sky Retractable Roof Removed

136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

The panels are able to withstand the snow. However,

it is recommended that you remove excessive layers

of snow that have accumulated or damage to the

panels may occur.

Power My Sky — If Equipped

Open/Close The Front Panel

The power My Sky switches are located on the overhead

console. The switches are used to open and close the front

panel.

Front Panel Operation Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137

To retract the front panel to the open position, push the

Open/Close button.

From the fully open position, pull the Open/Close

switch: the front panel will close completely.

Venting The Front Panel

To vent the front panel push and release the vent switch.

During the vent operation any push on the Open/Close

switch will stop the closing of the panel.

NOTE: If the My Sky is in open position, the vent switch

must be held until the panel vents.

Operation Switch

1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch

2 — Front Panel Vent Switch

138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Anti-Pinch Feature

The front panel of the retractable roof is equipped with a

anti-pinch safety system that is able to detect the pres-

ence of an obstacle during the opening and closing

motion of the panel.

When this event occurs, the front panel stops and re-

verses immediately.

NOTE: With both panels removed the retractable roof

cannot be opened or closed.

Removing And Installing Panels

NOTE:

• Remove the panels only when the vehicle is stationary.

• The rear panel can be removed only when the front

panel is completely closed or removed.

Removing Panels

1. Front panel must be in the closed position to remove

panel.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139

2. From inside of the passenger compartment, insert the

supplied key into the latch key hole.

Supplied Key

Latch Key Hole

140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Rotate and keep the key turned to the symbol to

release the lock and pull the panel handle down and

away from the stowed position, unlocking the panel.

Rotating Supplied Key

Unlocking Panel Handle

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141

4. Remove the key from the Latch Key Hole. 5. Remove the panel(s).

Removing Key Push Panel Up

142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

6. Place the panel(s) inside of the provided bag for

storage in the cargo area.

NOTE: An air deflector is available on the Jeep accessory

line. This deflector may be used to avoid the “tunnel

effect” inside the vehicle, if the front panel is removed.

Installing Panel

1. From outside the vehicle, place the panel(s) on the

slides.

2. Gently slide the front panel forward, or the rear panel

backwards.

Removing Panel

Installing Panel

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143

3. Align the colored guide tabs to ensure the panel(s)

close properly. Front panel is labeled with yellow

guide tabs. Rear panel is labeled with blue guide tabs.

4. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle down and

toward the stowed position, locking it into place.

Guide Tabs

Closing Panel Handle

144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Make sure that the panel has been properly refitted.

From inside the passenger compartment, push up-

ward on the panel from the bottom, in order to verify

that it is properly latched to the clamping locks.

Bag For Housing Panels — If Equipped

After the panels have been removed, store the roof panels

inside of the bag located inside the storage compartment.

NOTE: It is recommended to do this procedure outside of

the car.

Panel Locked

Roof Panel Bag

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145

For proper housing, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Roof Panel Bag and lift the panel dividers

toward the outside.

2. Place the first panel into the bag, fold the panel

dividers and place the second panel into the bag.

Panel Dividers

First Panel In Storage Bag

146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Close the bag and place it on the inside the cargo area.

4. Open the Velcro straps provided on the bag. Anchor

them firmly at the tie-down hooks located in the cargo

area.

Second Panel In Storage Bag

Tie-Down Hook Locations

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147

NOTE:

• Do not load objects that weigh over 165 pounds (75 kg)

on top of the roof panel bag.

• The bag is washable. Refer to the documentation that

is supplied with the bag.

Emergency Open/Close

If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retractable roof can

be operated manually as follows:

1. Remove the protective cap located on the inner lining.

2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that is supplied

in the tool bag in the cargo area.

3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the key hole

and turn it clockwise to open the roof or counter-

clockwise to close.

Tie-Down Straps

148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• When refitting panels, be careful to avoid fingers,

scarves, ties and items of clothing from getting

caught under the panels themselves.

• Do not open the roof in the presence of snow or ice.

There is risk of damage.

Emergency Key And Key Hole

1 — Key Hole

2 — Allen Key

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149

HOOD

Opening

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers side

of the instrument panel.

Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety

latch release lever toward the passenger side of the

vehicle. The hood release lever is located behind the

center front edge of the hood.

Hood Release Lever

Safety Latch

1 — Safety Latch Location

150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert

it into the seat located on the underside of the hood. Be

sure the rod is locked into position.

Locking Tab

Support Rod And Seat

1 — Support Rod

2 — Support Rod Seat

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151

Closing

Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other hand

remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into

the locking tab.

Lower the hood to approximately 6 inches (15 cm) from

the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the

hood is completely closed.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-

mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should

secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless

the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

LIFTGATE

Opening

To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock

switches located on the driver door handle.

To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate release

and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the

Electronic Liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry

RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the Liftgate, push

the Electronic Liftgate release to open with one fluid

motion.

Liftgate Handle Location

A — Liftgate Handle

Passive Entry Liftgate Handle Location

A — Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153

To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate release

and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

Emergency Opening

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).

2. Fold the rear seats forward.

3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo

floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.

Emergency Opening Tab Location

A — Yellow Tab

154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to

trigger the release tab of the Liftgate.

Closing

Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the

liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over

the closing effort.

Emergency Release Tab Slot Location

B — Release Tab Slot

A — Liftgate Closing Handle

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155

NOTE: Before closing the Liftgate, make sure to be in

possession of the key because the Liftgate will be locked

automatically.

Cargo Area Features

Cargo Load Floor

The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be

adjusted as needed.

Position 1 (Lowered Position):

This position allows you to make the load floor flat for

ease of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area.

This position also makes it possible to use the space

below as another compartment for storing fragile or

smaller objects.

Position 2 (Elevated Position):

When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat is

folded flat, it will allow for loading objects of long

dimensions. It is recommended to use this position only

during the actual transporting of the objects, then bring

the load floor in position 1.

Table Tilt Load

In addition to the two positions described above, the load

floor can also be placed in a tilted position (slanted

toward the rear seatbacks as to ease the access to the

underlying zone of the luggage compartment (e.g. to pick

up the spare tire or the Tire Service Kit).

Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the supports

1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.

156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The load floor provides securing of any cargo inside this

position, so that the cargo will slide in the case of sudden

braking.

Load Floor

Table Tilt Load Supports

1 — Loading Floor Support One

2 — Loading Floor Support Two

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157

Access To The Loading Floor

To access the double load compartment, proceed as

follows:

1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.

2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.

Load Floor Handle

1 — Cargo Load Floor

2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle

158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Reposition the load floor.

CAUTION!

The load floor must be arranged in a central position

with respect to cargo area.

Displacement Load Floor

To position the load from the lower to the upper position,

proceed as follows:

1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.

2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides

and on the rear cross member.

Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire

To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container

carrier, proceed as follows:

1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove the floor.

2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.

Cargo Area Storage

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159

Anchoring Of The Load

The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,

should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is

moving.

The side panels maybe equipped with three grocery

hooks (one on the left side and two on the right side) for

securing loads that are not excessively heavy.

Tie-Downs

Grocery Hook

160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Power Outlet

The rear cargo power outlet is located on the left side of

the cargo area.

The outlet only works when the ignition is in the

MAR/RUN position.

NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to

“battery” powered all the time by switching the power

outlet Integrated Power Module 20A fuse from fuse

location F18 to F30. Refer to “Engine Compartment

Controller” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further infor-

mation.

Grocery Hooks Rear 12 Volt Cargo Power Outlet

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161

CAUTION!

Do not connect devices with power higher than 180

Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the

socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt

(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-

ing the system will need to be replaced.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

Cargo Box — If Equipped

The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can

be used for the storage of objects that allows you to

obtain a uniform level when loading.

Cargo Box

162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of

distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg).

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passengers side

of the instrument panel.

To open the glove compartment proceed as follows:

1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle key.

2. Pull the handle to open the compartment.

Once the glove compartment is open, a light will turn on

to illuminate the compartment.

Opening The Glove Compartment

1 — Glove Compartment Handle

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163

NOTE:

• Do not insert objects in the glove compartment that

will not allow the compartment to fully close.

• The glove compartment should be completely closed

while the vehicle is in motion.

Sun Visors

Sun visors are located on both sides of the rearview

mirror. The visors can be lowered or moved to the side to

help block sunlight from entering the windshield or door

glass.

To move the sun visor against the driver or passenger

door glass, remove the sun visor from the hook and turn

it toward the side window.

The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors to allow

use in low light conditions.

Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the mirror.

Sun Visor Mirror

1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover

164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Extendible Sun Visor

To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:

1. Place the sun visor against the door glass by detaching

it from the hook and turning it toward the side

window.

2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide coverage more

to the rear.

Sliding Sun Visor

1 — Sun Visor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165

3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even more side

coverage toward the rear.

Power Outlets

The front power outlet is located under the center stack of

the instrument panel. It only operates with the ignition in

the MAR/RUN position.

Models equipped with the optional ⬙smoker kit,⬙ will

have a cigar lighter instead of the power outlet. Refer to

“Cigar Lighter⬙ in “Internal Equipment Storage” for

further information.

Using The Extender

12 Volt Power Outlet

166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not connect devices with power higher than 180

Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the

socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt

(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-

ing the system will need to be replaced.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-

tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167

Power Inverter — If Equipped

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located

on the back of the center console to convert DC current to

AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular

phones, electronics and other low power devices requir-

ing up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game

consoles, such as Playstation4 and XBox One will exceed

this power limit, as will most power tools.

The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off

when the device is plugged in or removed.

The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once

the electrical device has been removed from the Power

115 Volt Power Inverter

168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading

the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices

prior to using the Power Inverter.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

Cigar Lighter — Optional

NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized

dealer through MOPAR parts. To ensure proper cigar

lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be

used.

The cigar lighter is located on the center console. Push

lighter inward to heat.

After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to

its initial position and is ready to be used.

Cigar Lighter

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169

WARNING!

When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.

To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with

care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned

off.

CAUTION!

Do not connect devices with power higher than 180

Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the

socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt

(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-

ing the system will need to be replaced.

Ashtray — Optional

NOTE: Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized

dealer through MOPAR parts.

The ashtray is a plastic container that can be placed into

one of the cup holders.

Ashtray Location

170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Armrest

The front armrest is located between the front seats.

The armrest can be adjusted by moving it in the direction

indicated by the arrows.

Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to access

the storage compartment.

Front Armrest Handle

Storage Compartment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-

ment lid in the open position. Driving with the

console compartment lid open may result in injury in

a collision.

Cupholders

There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,

located in the center console.

Front Cupholders

172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

There are two cupholders located in the rear armrest if

equipped.

Handle Grip

The handle grip is located on the passenger side of the

instrument panel. The handle can be used to enter or exit

the vehicle or when traveling on rough terrain.

Rear Cupholders

Handle Grip

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 173

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage Rack

for transporting accessories.

Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is

placed on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the straps

frequently to be sure that the load remains securely

attached.

NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a authorized

dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do not in-

crease the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be

sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the

vehicle, plus the load on the Roof Luggage Rack, do not

exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a

luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it

should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.

Do not use the retractable roof when using the crossbars.

CAUTION!

• To avoid damage to the Roof Luggage Rack and

vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load

capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly

as possible and secure the load appropriately.

• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,

such as wood panels or surfboards, should be

secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

• Place a blanket or other protection between the

surface of the roof and the load.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully

when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof

rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby

truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is

especially true on large flat loads and may result in

damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Roof rack cargo must be securely tied down before

driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads may

fall off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, re-

sulting in personal injury or property damage. Fol-

low the Roof Luggage Rack warnings and cautions

when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 175

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

CONTENTS

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................179

▫ Instrument Cluster With Multi-Functional

Display (EVIC) .......................179

▫ Instrument Cluster With Reconfigurable

Multi-Functional Display (DID)............180

▫ Speedometer (EVIC)....................181

▫ Speedometer (DID) ....................182

▫ Odometer ...........................183

▫ Tachometer ..........................183

▫ Fuel Gauge ..........................183

▫ Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.........184

䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......185

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............186

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............198

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............211

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light ..............213

▫ White Telltale Indicator Light .............214

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .215

▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity ........................215

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION

CENTER (EVIC) / DRIVER INFORMATION

DISPLAY (DID) ........................216

▫ EVIC/DID Description..................216

▫ Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display

(EVIC) — If Equipped ..................217

▫ Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display

(DID) — (If Equipped) ..................219

▫ Oil Change Reset .....................221

▫ EVIC/DID Control Buttons...............222

▫ EVIC/DID Main Menu .................223

䡵 TRIP COMPUTER ......................234

▫ Quantities Displayed ...................235

▫ OK Button ..........................235

178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Instrument Cluster With Multi-Functional Display (EVIC)

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Cluster

A — Tachometer

B — Digital Indicator Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

With Maximum Temperature

C — Multi-functional Display

D — Digital Indicator Fuel Level Indicator With The Reserve (the

triangle symbol pointing toward the right indicates where the

fuel filler door is located)

E — Speedometer (speed indicator)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 179

Instrument Cluster With Reconfigurable Multi-Functional Display (DID)

Driver Information Display (DID) Cluster

A — Tachometer

B — Digital Indicator Engine Coolant Temperature

C — Multi-functional Display

D — Digital Indicator Fuel Level (the triangle symbol pointing

toward the right indicates where the fuel filler door is located)

E — Speedometer (speed indicator)

180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Speedometer (EVIC)

Indicates the speed of the vehicle in MPH or km/h.

Adjusting Instrument Panel Illumination (Light Sen-

sor)

Inside the speedometer, a light sensor detects ambient

light conditions and adjusts the brightness of the instru-

ment cluster.

Instrument Panel Light Sensor Zone

1 — Instrument Panel Light Sensor Zone

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 181

The instrument works as follows:

• In ⬙day⬙ mode the display, the graphics, and all indexes

for the instrument cluster are fully illuminated and are

not adjustable

• In ⬙night⬙ mode the display, the graphics, and the

indexes are adjusted accordingly. Even the light inten-

sity of the automatic dual zone climate control system

and the Uconnect system display

Speedometer (DID)

Indicates the speed of the vehicle in MPH or km/h.

Adjusting Instrument Panel Illumination (Light Sen-

sor)

Inside the speedometer, a light sensor detects ambient

light conditions and adjusts the brightness of the instru-

ment cluster.

Instrument Panel Light Sensor Zone

1 — Instrument Panel Light Sensor Zone

182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

The instrument works as follows:

• In ⬙day⬙ mode the display, the graphics, and all indexes

for the instrument cluster are fully illuminated and are

not adjustable

• In ⬙night⬙ mode the display, the graphics, and the

indexes are adjusted accordingly. Even the light inten-

sity of the automatic dual zone climate control system

and the Uconnect system display

Odometer

The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of

vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the

correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your

odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair

technician should leave the odometer reading the same

as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,

then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must

be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was

before the repair or service.

It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer

reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure

that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is

accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

Tachometer

Reports the number of Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) of

the engine.

Fuel Gauge

The digital indicator on the display indicates the amount

of fuel in the fuel tank.

When the fuel tank level drops to 1.3-1.85 gallons (5-7

liters) remaining, a light will illuminate, a message will

display, and a chime will sound.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 183

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that

the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

In the normal use of the car, the digital scale may move in

different positions.

Instrument Cluster With EVIC/DID

The indicator light will illuminate, a message will dis-

play, and a chime will sound to indicate an excessive rise

in the temperature of the engine coolant.

In the case of excessive rises in the temperature of the

engine coolant, the engine may shut down. See an

authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining And

Caring For Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under

the “Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on

in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-

sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These

indications are indicative and precautionary and as such

must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative

to the information contained in the Owner Manual,

which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the

event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The

system check menu may appear different based upon

equipment options and current vehicle status. Some

telltales are optional and may not appear.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 185

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a

chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains un-

buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will

sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Air Bag Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has

been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer

to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 187

Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

United States

Canada

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-

voir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at

the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system

malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may

be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 189

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Vehicle Security Warning Light

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-

hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Oil Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 191

Charging System Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Charging System Warning Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes

on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase

engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is

experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an

authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-

gencies.”

192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-

pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and

completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn

off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;

however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and

you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your

vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/

RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,

have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 193

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning

Light

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and

the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after

reaching a set threshold.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system

is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-

perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-

vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-

mation.

194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning

This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-

fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Door Open Indicator Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Door Open Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 195

Hood Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.

Liftgate Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Liftgate Open Warning Light

This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.

196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Transmission Fault Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Transmission Fault Warning Light

This light will illuminate (together with a message in the EVIC and a buzzer) to indicate a

transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the

engine.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 197

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-

cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and

stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-

come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer

immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-

formation.

198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair

immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be

checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 199

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 201

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-

hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),

see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each

time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was

turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused

the ESC activation.

202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 203

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The

light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked

promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate

the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-

eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not

require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to

immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-

viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine

control system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result

in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or

others.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 205

Glow Plug Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Glow Plug Indicator Light

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will in-

hibit engine cranking and this icon will blink when the ambient temperature is less than

–35° C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been

used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when

the ambient temperature is below -32° C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.

Low Fuel Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Fuel Indicator Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and re-

main on until fuel is added.

206 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when

the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator

changes from solid green to solid yellow.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing

yellow.

Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further

information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 207

Vehicle Security Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Vehicle Security Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm system has detected an attempt

was made to break into the vehicle.

Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.

208 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Forward Collision Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Forward Collision Indicator Light

This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Forward Collision Off Indicator Light

This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 209

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-

gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.

Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Audio System Failure Light

The telltale illuminates to report a failure of the Audio System.

Contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

210 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as

selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the mul-

tifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 211

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged.

212 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light

What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control

lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to

switch the headlights back to low beam.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 213

White Telltale Indicator Light

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.

Cruise Control Cancelled Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Cruise Control Cancelled Light

This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to

“Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further in-

formation.

214 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic

system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to

information related to the performance of your emissions

controls. Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the diagnosis and

service of your vehicle and emissions system.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 215

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-

nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in

order to diagnose or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior

tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be impaired or a

loss of vehicle control could occur that may result

in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information

stored in your vehicle systems, including per-

sonal information.

For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and

“Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “ All About Uconnect Ac-

cess” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and

“Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s

Manual on the DVD.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) / DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

EVIC/DID Description

The vehicle can be equipped with multifunctional dis-

play (EVIC), or a reconfigurable multifunctional display

(DID), which offers useful information to the driver.

With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key

removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/

closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,

and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.

216 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display (EVIC)

— If Equipped

The display shows the following information, if equipped:

• Zone (1)

– Date (Centered)

– Compass (Centered)

– Time (Centered)

– External Temp. (Centered)

• Zone (2)

– Actual Gear Indication (Centered)

– PRND (Centered)

• Zone (3)

– Date (Centered)

– Compass (Centered)

– Time (Centered)

– External Temp. (Centered)

• Zone (4)

– Audio Info (Centered)

– Title (Centered)

– Title Number (Centered)

Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 217

• Zone (4A)

– Title (Centered)

– Browsing Arrows (Left)

– Title Number (Right)

• Zone (4B)

– Title (Centered)

• Zone (4C)

– Title (Centered)

– Browsing Arrows (Left)

– Title Number (Right)

• Zone (5)

– Trip and Fuel Label (Left)

– Trip and Fuel Units (Left)

– Trip and Fuel Value (Right)

– Trip and Fuel Progress Bar (Centered)

– Text (Left)

• Zone (6)

– Red Telltale Lights

• Zone (7)

– White Telltale Lights

• Zone (8)

– Odometer Digits (Left)

– Odometer Unit (Right)

– Cruise Control Speed Set (Center)

– Speed Buzzer (Right)

• Zone (9)

– Yellow Telltale Lights

218 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display (DID)

— (If Equipped)

• Zone (1) – Includes 1A and 1B combined

– TRIP Info (Centered)

– Title (Centered)

– Audio Info (Centered)

• Zone (1A)

– Up and down arrow (Left)

– Title number

• Zone (1B)

– External Temp. (Centered)

– Title (Centered)

– Time (Centered)

• Zones (1, 2 & 3)

– Date

– Compass

– Time

– External Temp.

• Zone (2)

– Double scale (Centered)

Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display (DID)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 219

• Zone (2 & 3)

– Ignition Button Info (Centered)

• Zone (4)

– Speed Warning Title

• Zone (5)

– Text (Centered)

– Side Distance Warning

– Park Sense: Front & Rear

• Zone (6)

– Odometer Digits (Left)

– Odometer Unit (Right)

– Side Distance Warning

– Park Sense: Front & Rear

• Zone (7)

– Red Telltales (Centered)

• Zone (8)

– Amber Telltales (Centered)

• Zone (9)

– PRND (Centered)

– Soft Telltale (Centered)

• Zone (10)

– Hill Decent Control Telltale (Centered)

• Zone (11–12)

– Telltales (Centered)

• Zone (13)

– Forward Collision Telltale (Centered)

• Zone (14)

– Soft Telltale (Centered)

– Cruise Control ICON (Centered)

• Zone (15)

– Cruise Control Value (Centered)

220 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

• Zone (16)

– Soft Telltale (Centered)

– Speed Buzzer (Right)

• Zone (17)

– Active Park Sense

• Zone (18)

– Active Park Sense

Oil Change Reset

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-

cator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will display

in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has

sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.

The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,

which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,

dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN

position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after

performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the

following procedure.

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the

OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 221

EVIC/DID Control Buttons

The system allows the driver to select information by push-

ing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the main menu and

submenus.

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu and

submenus.

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the information screens or submenu

screens of a main menu item.

• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to

access the information screens or submenu

screens of a main menu item.

EVIC/DID Control Buttons

1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And Submenus

2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/Submenu Screens

3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting Information

222 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

• OK Button

The OK button may be used for the following:

Select

Reset (hold)

EVIC/DID Main Menu

The Main Menu is composed of several options that can

be selected using the control buttons above.

NOTE:

• The display mode of the menu items varies depending

on the type of display.

• For some items, a submenu is provided.

• In the Uconnect system, some items on the menu are

not shown on the instrument panel display.

Menu Items

The Menu has the following options:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Driver Assist

• Fuel Economy

• Trip

• Audio

• Messages

• Screen Setup

• Settings

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 223

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

“Speedometer” is highlighted in the EVIC. Push the OK

button to change the speedometer scale from MPH

to km/h (km/h to MPH).

Vehicle Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

⬙Vehicle Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push and

release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will

be displayed. Push the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button to

scroll through the following information displays:

• Tire Pressure

View the information relating to the TPMS system (if

equipped).

• Coolant Temperature

View the engine coolant temperature.

• Oil Temperature

View the engine oil temperature.

• Battery Voltage

View the voltage value (state of charge) of the battery.

• Service

View the service status message(s).

Driver Assist

This menu item allows you to change the settings (⬙No-

tice LaneSense⬙ and ⬙Intensity LaneSense⬙) relating to the

LaneSense system (if equipped).

• Notice LaneSense

By selecting this function, you can select the ⬙readiness⬙

of LaneSense, choosing between the options ⬙Near,⬙⬙Me-

dium,⬙ or ⬙Far.⬙

224 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

• Intensity LaneSense

Using this function, you can select the force applied to

the steering wheel to keep the car in the roadway through

the electrical drive system due to LaneSense.

Fuel Economy

This menu item allows you to set the unit of measure-

ment for the ⬙Fuel Economy and Range.⬙

• Average Economy/Instantaneous Economy

By selecting these options, you can choose the unit of

measurement of the average fuel economy and the in-

stantaneous, choosing between ⬙MPG⬙ or ⬙l/100 km⬙ or

⬙km/l.⬙

• Range

By selecting this option, you can choose the unit of

measurement for Range, choosing between ⬙km⬙ or

⬙miles.”

Trip

This menu item allows you to view information about the

⬙Trip Computer.⬙

The information displayed, for Trip A and for Trip B, are:

• Distance

(Miles or Km)

• Average Consumption

(MPG, or l/ 100km or km/l)

• Travel Time

(Hour/Minute)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 225

Audio

This menu item allows you to view the instrument

cluster display and the information present on the dis-

play of the Uconnect system.

The information displayed is:

• “Radio (AM or FM)”

View Radio Station Name (if equipped), frequency, and

graphical icon

• ⴖMP3”

Title display or number song playing

• ⴖUSBⴖ

Title display or number song playing

• ⴖIpodⴖ

Display song title (if equipped)

See Phone

The instrument cluster display can also display the

information concerning phone mode.

The information that can be displayed is the connection

status of the mobile phone (phone connected or discon-

nected), the active telephone calls/incoming/on hold,

and the management of double calls (first incoming

second waiting, etc.).

Messages

This menu item allows you to display the information

messages/malfunction stored.

226 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Vehicles With Multi-Functional Display Reconfigu-

rable

The background color of the display varies according to

the priorities of the failure:

• Failed Messages with low priority

Displays in yellow

• Failed Messages with high priority

Displays in red

Screen Setup

This menu item allows you to change the position of the

information on the display.

Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable Multi-

Functional Display And Automatic Transmission)

By selecting this item, you can select the display mode,

the particulars relating to the automatic transmission,

and choose between the following options:

• ⴖSingle digitⴖ

The right side of the display will show the letter concern-

ing the automatic transmission shift lever (P,N,R or D)

position. After approximately two seconds, the letter will

be displayed in a central position.

• ⴖFull PNRDⴖ

(Default): The right side of the display the letters PNRD,

the position assumed by the shift lever will be high-

lighted in the display. During the operation in sequential

mode (⬙AutoStick⬙), in place of the letter D, the gear will

be will be displayed.

In The Upper-Left/Top Right

The information relating to the following can be dis-

played:

• External temperature

• Compass (If Equipped)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 227

• Date (Month/Day)

• Time (Hours/Minutes)

In the central area of the display, you can view all of the

information listed above as well as the following:

• Audio Information

• Speed Display (If Equipped)

• Date (Day/Month/Year)

• Range To Empty

• Menu Item

• Average Consumption

• Current Consumption

• Distance Traveled (Trip)

• Distance Traveled B (Trip B)

Restore Default Settings

Selecting this item, and you can reset and restore the

default settings.

Settings

This menu item allows you to change the settings for the

following:

• Display

• Units

• Clock and Date

• Security

• Safety and Assistance

• Lights

• Doors and Locks

• Compass (If Equipped)

228 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Vehicles Equipped With Multifunctional Display

Reconfigurable:

Menu items ⬙Display⬙ (you can select

only the items ⬙See Phone⬙ and ⬙See Navigation,⬙⬙Secu-

rity,⬙ and ⬙Safety & Assistance⬙ (only ⬙Volume Alerts⬙ is

selectable) are present.

All other entries are displayed and selected on the

display of the Uconnect system.

“Display”

By selecting the ⬙Display,⬙ you can access the following

settings:

• Language: allows you to select the language in which

to display the information/warnings.

• Phone Repetition: allows you to view, on the instru-

ment cluster display, the information relating to Phone

mode displayed on the display of the Uconnect sys-

tem.

• NAV Turn By Turn: allows you to view, on the

instrument cluster display, information relating to the

navigation mode.

ⴖUnits Of Measureⴖ

By selecting the item ⬙Units of measure,⬙ you can select

the unit of measure to use for displaying various magni-

tudes.

Possible options are:

• US

• Metric

• Custom

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 229

ⴖClock & Dataⴖ

By selecting the item, ⬙Clock & Data⬙ you can adjust the

clock.

Possible options are:

• Set Time: adjust hours/minutes

• Set Format: adjust the time format ⬙12h⬙ (12 hours) or

⬙ 24h⬙ (24 hours)

• Set Date: adjust day/month/year

Security

By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the

following adjustments:

• Speed Warning:

Set the vehicle speed limit (km/h or mph), which the

driver is notified through a visual and acoustic signaling

(display of a message and a symbol on the display).

When the speed warning is set, the icon should remain

visualized for the same duration time of the pop up. If

the driver exceeded the speed set the icon should remain

for however long the vehicle is over the set speed.

Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF” should

you choose not to use this feature.

• Seat Belt Reminder:

This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt Re-

minder (SBR) system is active.

• Hill Start Assist:

Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system.

ⴖSafety & Assistanceⴖ

By selecting the item ⬙Safety & Assistance,⬙ you can make

the following adjustments:

• FCW: a selection of operating modes of the system

Forward Collision Warning Plus

230 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

• FCW Sensitivity: a selection of the ⬙readiness⬙ of

intervention of the Forward Collision Warning Plus

system, based on the distance to the obstacle

• ParkSense: a selection of the type of information

provided by ParkSense

• Rear Parks. Vol.: selection of the volume of acoustic

signals provided by ParkSense

• ParkSense Vol.: a selection of the volume of acoustic

signals provided by ParkSense

• Front Parks. Vol.: selection of the volume of the beeps

provided by ParkSense

• Side Dist. Warn. Vol. (If equipped) : a selection of the

volume of the beeps of SideSense system

• Side Dist. Warn. (if Equipped) : Select the type of

reporting provided by SideSense system

• Auto Wipers: enabling/disabling the automatic opera-

tion of wipers in the event of rain

• LaneSense Warn.: a selection of the ⬙readiness⬙ of

intervention of LaneSense

• LaneSense Force: selection of the force to be applied to

the steering wheel to put the car in the roadway

through the system of electrical drive, in case of

operation of the system LaneSense

• Buzzer Volume

• Maintenance Brakes (If Equipped): activation of the

procedure to carry out braking system maintenance

• Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable auto-

insertion of the Electric Parking Brake

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 231

ⴖLightsⴖ

By selecting the item ⬙Lights,⬙ you can make the follow-

ing adjustments:

• Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shut-

off after engine shutoff

• Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of head-

light brightness

• Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate the day-

time running lights

• Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the cornering

lights (If Equipped)

• Automatic High Beam: activate/deactivate the auto-

matic main beam headlights (If Equipped)

ⴖDoors & Locksⴖ

By selecting the item ⬙Doors & Locks,⬙ you can make the

following adjustments:

• Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the automatic

locking of the doors with the vehicle moving

• Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of the

doors when exiting the vehicle

• Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction indicators

when closing the doors

• Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate the horn

when pressing the LOCK button on the RKE. The

options are ⬙Off,⬙⬙First Press,” and ⬙Second Press.⬙

• Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate the horn

at the Remote Starting of the engine with the RKE.

232 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

• Unlock On First Press Of Key Fob (vehicles without

Passive Entry): allows you to choose whether to un-

lock all the doors or only the driver’s side door on the

first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE

• Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the driver

door only on the first push of the UNLOCK button on

the RKE

• Passive Entry (If Equipped) : activate the automatic

locking of the doors

ⴖCompassⴖ

By selecting the item ⬙Compass,⬙ you can view and

change the following settings:

• Calibration

• Variance

Calibration

The compass calibrates itself automatically, so you may

not need any initial calibration. It is required to confirm

the calibration by pressing the OK button and drive in

one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large

metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function

normally.

Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences, the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly

set, the compass will automatically compensate for the

differences and provide the most accurate compass head-

ing.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 233

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the

instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-

tops, and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass

module is located, and it can cause interference with the

compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

TRIP COMPUTER

The Trip computer is used to display information on car

operation when the key is turned to the MAR/RUN

position.

This function allows you to define two separate trips

called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car’s ⬙complete

trips⬙ are monitored in an independent manner.

Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip). To

perform a reset, push and hold the OK button on the

steering wheel controls.

“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to:

• Distance Travelled

• Average Consumption

• Travel Time (driving time)

• Average Speed

Compass Variance Map

234 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Quantities Displayed

Distance Travelled

Indicates the distance travelled by the start of the new

trip.

Average Consumption

Represents the average fuel consumption since the start

of the new trip.

Average Speed

Represents the average speed since the start of the new

trip.

Travel Time

Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.

OK Button

Short Push Of The Button: display of various parameters.

Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and begin a

new trip.

New trip

Starts after reset:

• ⬙Manual⬙ by pushing the OK button.

• ⬙Automatic⬙ when the ⬙distance⬙ reaches the value is

62140 (99999.9 km) or when the ⬙time travel⬙ reaches

the value of 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).

• After each disconnection and reconnection of the bat-

tery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 235

SAFETY

CONTENTS

䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................239

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .240

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............241

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............244

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............244

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........245

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................246

▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .247

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........250

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC OFF Indicator Light ............255

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............256

▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........257

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .........258

▫ Important Safety Precautions .............258

▫ Seat Belt Systems .....................259

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .......274

▫ Child Restraints ......................291

▫ Transporting Pets .....................312

䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................312

▫ Transporting Passengers .................312

▫ Exhaust Gas .........................313

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle .............................314

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle ...................316

238 SAFETY

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic

brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic

systems loses normal capability, the remaining

system will still function. However, there will

be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be

evident by increased pedal travel during application and

greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In

addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the

hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on

as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,

repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the

brakes will still function. However, the effort required to

brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required

with the power system operating.

WARNING!

• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting

or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-

mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining

wear, and possible brake damage. You would not

have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”

on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking

performance or vehicle stability during braking

may occur. It will take you longer to stop the

vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.

You could have a collision. Have the vehicle

checked immediately.

SAFETY 239

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-

gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle

path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual

path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-

priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or

understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-

cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon

as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes

active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash

during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply

as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed

and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all

(Continued)

240 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

accidents, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions

resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-

propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-

teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-

mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle

maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the

driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse

braking conditions. The system operates with a separate

computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent

wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery

surfaces.

SAFETY 241

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and

type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce

accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing

sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss

of braking effectiveness.

The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately

12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the

brake while this test is occurring, you may feel slight

pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent

on ice and snow. This is normal.

The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph

(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor

makes a low humming noise during operation, which is

normal.

WARNING!

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to

slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded

by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or

the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

242 SAFETY

CAUTION!

The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of

electronic interference caused by improperly in-

stalled aftermarket radios or telephones.

NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-

sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This

is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.

• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the

pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in

unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-

tances, or brake damage.

• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking

can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.

Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the

transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-

sible.

• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,

which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in

loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while

driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver-

ing, parking, or stopping.

• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially

when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can

build up between the tire tread and the road. This

hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking

ability, and control.

• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes

may become wet, resulting in decreased performance

and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by

gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very

slow speeds.

SAFETY 243

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake

pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited

Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip

differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven

axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than

the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning

wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied

to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains

active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode

or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability

Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-

ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

244 SAFETY

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-

cluding those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-

planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the

chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive

driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to

other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-

way, or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”

mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this

section for a complete explanation of the available ESC

modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll

(Continued)

SAFETY 245

WARNING! (Continued)

Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or

rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the

roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The

capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never

be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,

which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety

of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate

the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If

the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,

HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short

period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this

time expires, the system will release brake pressure and

the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system

will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of

throttle applied.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) grade or

greater hill.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction

(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle

backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,

the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward

gears. The system will not activate if the transmission

is in PARK.

246 SAFETY

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,

such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or

while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to other

vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-

hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-

tion is always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in

4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while

descending hills during various driving situations. HDC

controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)

SAFETY 247

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation

conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding

with brake or throttle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling

vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the

following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.

• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).

• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.

• Driver door is closed.

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if

driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater

than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is

selectable by the driver and can be adjusted using brake

and throttle input.

Driver Override:

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or

brake application at anytime.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of

the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake

application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains

below 25 mph (40 km/h).

248 SAFETY

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-

tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,

or is on an uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the

following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the HDC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)

(HDC exits immediately.)

Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC

switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver

about the state HDC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and

remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is

the normal operating condition for HDC.

• The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then

extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch

when enable conditions have not been met.

The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-

Terrain knob in the upper right position.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver

must remain attentive to the driving conditions and

is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

SAFETY 249

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-

gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle

path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual

path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-

priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or

understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-

cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon

as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes

active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash

during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply

as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed

and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all

accidents, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

(Continued)

250 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions

resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-

propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-

teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-

mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle

maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operation Modes

To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow the

instruction below.

There are three modes of active safety systems present on

the vehicle:

• ESC On

• Partial Off

• Full Off

SAFETY 251

ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel

Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range

This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper-

ating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal

mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or

4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”

mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power

transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW

range. This mode should be used for most driving

situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or

“Full Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial

Off” and to “Full Off” for additional information.

NOTE: It is recommended to select the mode ⬙Partial Off⬙

or ⬙Full Off⬙ only for specific reasons.

Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four

Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep

snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for

TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel

spin than what ESC normally allows.

ESC OFF Button

252 SAFETY

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the

“ESC Off” button and the ESC Off indicator light will

illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push

the ESC OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light will

turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of

operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,

sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the

“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC

Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”

mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily

pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while

the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality

of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-

scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and

the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.

When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power

reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the

enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-

tem is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the

ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

SAFETY 253

Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High

And 4WD Low Range

The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and

off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit

vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. The “ESC

Off” button is located in the lower switch bank above the

climate control panel. To enter “Full Off” mode, push and

hold the “ESC Off” button for five seconds while the

vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five

seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and

an “ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.

In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the

“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until

the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At

speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically

switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When

the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),

the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The ESC

OFF indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is

off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC

Off” button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode

of operation.

NOTE: With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency

evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to

assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is only

intended for off-highway or off-road use.

NOTE:

• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD

LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode

whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or

the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW

range.

254 SAFETY

• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will

sound when the shift lever is moved from any position

to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK

position. This will occur even if the message was

cleared previously.

Selec-Terrain — If Equipped

On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the activation of

some driving modes provide partial off or full off of some

active safety systems in order to optimize performance in

specific modes.

Partial or full off of the active safety systems will be

indicated by a light in the instrument cluster.

In ⬙SAND⬙ and ⬙MUD⬙ the active safety systems are

partially disabled and put in place to ensure maximum

performance in the specific mode of operation. However,

you can reactivate them completely at any time by

pushing the button.

NOTE: In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are

completely bypassed in order to ensure maximum off-

road performance.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

SAFETY 255

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as

the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

flashes when Traction Control System is active. If the

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to

flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and

apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your

speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially

off or full off.

The ESC OFF switch is located in the center console.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-

sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate

actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may

reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-

priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC

will become active automatically once an excessively

swaying trailer is recognized.

256 SAFETY

NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Al-

ways use caution when towing a trailer and follow the

trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer

Towing” in this section for further information. When

TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be

reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to

individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from

swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the

“Partial Off” mode.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle

down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the

trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system

with the electric power steering to increase the safety

level of the whole car. In critical situations (understeer-

ing, oversteering, braking with different grip conditions),

through the DST function the ESC system controls the

steering to implement an additional torque contribution

on the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct ma-

neuver to the driver. The coordinated action of brakes

and steering increases the safety and car control feeling.

NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not

replace the driver’s actions while driving the car.

SAFETY 257

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should

be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-

dren who do not use child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled

up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

258 SAFETY

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle

has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air

bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-

pants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact

the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided

under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and could cause a collision that includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

SAFETY 259

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle

their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-

ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or

MAR/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first

turned to the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a

chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or

outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the

ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or

MAR/ RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will

turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat

belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger

seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the

vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range

and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-

buckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is

not active when the outboard front passenger seat is

unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by

blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an

intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence

has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain

on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the

driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat

belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-

pants to buckle their seat belts.

260 SAFETY

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,

the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat

belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger

seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front

passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered

when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front

passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if

equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in

the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers

that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly

stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-

rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-

vating BeltAlert.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver

or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled the Seat

Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the

driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are

buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-

der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

SAFETY 261

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-

led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

262 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If

you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have

it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-

nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

•

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck

injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

(Continued)

SAFETY 263

WARNING! (Continued)

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect

the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and

pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

264 SAFETY

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces

the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

SAFETY 265

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed

position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the

webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to

create a fold that begins immediately above the latch

plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of

the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Releasing the Seat Belt

266 SAFETY

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or

squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and

move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down

to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing or squeezing the release but-

ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull

downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

locked into position.

Adjustable Anchorage

SAFETY 267

Second Row Center Belt Operating Instructions

The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with

a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt

to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.

The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be

stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience

to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the

front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate

from its stowed position on the seat.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over

the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head

restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the

mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a

“click.”

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

268 SAFETY

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the

lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding

under the seat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-

tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle.

10.

To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-

buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into

the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt

will automatically retract to its stowed position. If

necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch

plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

SAFETY 269

WARNING!

• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not

properly connected when the seat belt is used by an

occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide

proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding

procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the

mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an

accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child

if they are wearing a seat belt.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

270 SAFETY

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen

and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the

shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under

the arm .

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning

devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners

work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or

a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of

a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly

that is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

SAFETY 271

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below

defines the type of feature for each seating position.

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the

seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate

the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out

only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably

wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-

matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to

remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a

seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be

properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

272 SAFETY

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-

ture or any other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

(Continued)

SAFETY 273

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraints that have a harness for restraining

the child.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

274 SAFETY

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact

Bolster

SAFETY 275

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front

passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon

seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat

belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

276 SAFETY

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,

because any such objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may

damage the air bags and you could be injured

because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are

designed to open only when the air bags are

inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-

ways wear your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk

of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes

with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

SAFETY 277

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large

quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-

pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

278 SAFETY

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver

Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the

steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by

working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and

Advanced Front Air Bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”

label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover

events, in addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body structure.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

SAFETY 279

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-

board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the

occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high

speed and with such a high force that it could injure

occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children

are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could be

pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim

covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

280 SAFETY

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries

to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side

impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the

injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and

body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-

dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the

trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs

inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are

not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned

in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!

•

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-

dows where the SABIC and its deployment path

are located should remain free from any obstruc-

tions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any

accessory items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your

vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the

vehicle for any reason.

SAFETY 281

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover

events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-

termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in

a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously

injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should

never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat

that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

(Continued)

282 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on

the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require

Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the

Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact

deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side

impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during

angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover

events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-

priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover

event may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a roll-

over or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side

SAFETY 283

Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will

also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of

the vehicle.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-

tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a

carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by

contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and

normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed

significantly within a few days, or if you have any

blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air

bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the

skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-

ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air

bags will not be in place to protect you.

284 SAFETY

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-

diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,

but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light

button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the

intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem.

• Unlock the power door locks.

• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.

• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.

• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.

SAFETY 285

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a

message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the

ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/

ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-

fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine

compartment and on the ground near the engine com-

partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and

starting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and right

turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may

both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to

move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must

follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Action Customer Will See

1. Turn Ignition OFF.

(Turn Signal Switch Must

Be Placed In Neutral

State).

2. Turn Ignition ON. Left Turn Light Is OFF.

Right Turn Light

BLINKS.

3. Turn Right Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Right Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Left Turn Light

BLINKS.

4. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Left Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Right Turn Signal

Light BLINKS.

5. Turn Right Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Right Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Left Turn Light

BLINKS.

286 SAFETY

Customer Action Customer Will See

6. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Left Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Right Turn Light

Is ON SOLID.

7. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch OFF. (Turn Signal

Switch Must Be Placed In

Neutral State).

Left Turn light Is OFF.

Right Turn Light is OFF.

8. Turn Ignition OFF.

9. Turn Hazard Flashers

OFF (Manually).

System is now reset and

the engine may be

started.

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60

seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the

reset procedure must be performed again in order to be

successful.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your

protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal

circuits and interconnecting wiring associated

with air bag system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the

ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the

air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds

for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to

SAFETY 287

the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,

the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC

detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns

on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or

continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the

light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-

tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition

the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument

panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to

protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on

as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the

on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or

if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer

service the air bag system immediately.

288 SAFETY

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,

which could affect the Supplemental Restraint

System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warn-

ing Light will illuminate on the instrument

panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single

chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.

If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on

intermittently or remains on while driving have an

authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For

additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of

this manual.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the air bag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may

(Continued)

SAFETY 289

WARNING! (Continued)

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the air bag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

290 SAFETY

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-

ecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to

hold even an infant on your lap could become so

great that you could not hold the child, no matter

how strong you are. The child and others could be

badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle

should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

SAFETY 291

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the

instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s

Manual and on all the labels attached to the child

restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has

a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install

it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to

www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–732–8243.

•

Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s

website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/

motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

292 SAFETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or

younger and who have not reached the

height or weight limits of their child

restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in the

rear seat of the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two years old

or who have out-grown the height or

weight limit of their rear-facing child

restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a

five-point Harness, facing forward in the

rear seat of the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their

forward-facing child restraint, but are

too small to properly fit the vehicle’s

seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the

vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat

of the vehicle

Children Too Large for

Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who

have out-grown the height or weight

limit of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat

of the vehicle

SAFETY 293

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing

in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they

reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing

child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they

reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats

often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing

direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used

rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant

carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the

highest weight or height allowed by their convertible

child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown

their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-

facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and

convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

294 SAFETY

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for

as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height

allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a

belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over

the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held

in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting

the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-

ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it

loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

SAFETY 295

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this

simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front

of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the

way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching

the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,

move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use

a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child

correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

296 SAFETY

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

SAFETY 297

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages

located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s

seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

298 SAFETY

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

•

— Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position

•

— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY 299

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight

+ weight of the child restraint) for using

the LATCH anchorage system to attach

the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the

seat belt and tether anchor instead of the

LATCH system once the combined

weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat

belt be used together to attach a rear-

facing or forward-facing child restraint?

No Do not use the seat belt when you use

the LATCH anchorage system to attach a

rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraint.

Can a child seat be installed in the center

position using the inner LATCH lower

anchorage?

No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to

install a child seat in the center seating

position.

300 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can two child restraints be attached us-

ing a common lower LATCH anchorage?

No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with

two or more child restraints. If the center

position does not have dedicated LATCH

lower anchorages, use the seat belt to

install a child seat in the center position

next to a child seat using the LATCH

anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch

the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes The child seat may touch the back of the

front passenger seat if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact. See

your child restraint owner’s manual for

more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints may be removed in

every rear seating position.

SAFETY 301

Locating LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-

bols on the seatback. They are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the

gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

A — Lower Anchorage Location

302 SAFETY

Locating Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located on the back of the

seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower

anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end

to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH:

WARNING!

• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-

tion using the LATCH system. This position is not

approved for installing child seats using the

LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt

and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center

seating position.

(Continued)

Tether Anchorage Locations

SAFETY 303

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing

The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”

for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-

facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child

restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat

belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”

to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more

easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward

to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-

ing position.

304 SAFETY

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack

in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being

used by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,

buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with

the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock

the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with

them.

SAFETY 305

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat

belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not

necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking

Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-

ditional information on ALR.

306 SAFETY

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

= Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY 307

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the Tether Anchor

with the seat belt to attach a for-

ward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when

using the seat belt to install a for-

ward facing child restraint, up to

the recommended weight limit of

the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes Contact between the front passen-

ger seat and the child restraint is

allowed, if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Yes The head restraints should only be

removed by qualified technicians.

If any of the head restraints require

removal, see your authorized

dealer.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten the seat belt against the belt

path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a

seating position with an ALR

retractor.

308 SAFETY

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing

out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract

back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you

will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is

now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

SAFETY 309

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat

to any location in front of the car seat, including the

seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating position,

located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to

install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.

You may need to move the seat forward to provide

better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the

child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one

is available.

310 SAFETY

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If

your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head

restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

SAFETY 311

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly

behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove

slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

312 SAFETY

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is

set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation

mode.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SAFETY 313

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat

belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light

will turn on for four to

eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch

is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,

have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as

soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a

single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning

Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault

is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-

able.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your

vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

314 SAFETY

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-

ing with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the

pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have

been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-

jects can become trapped under the brake pedal

and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle

control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of

control of the vehicle.

SAFETY 315

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are

suspected, the cause should be located and corrected

immediately.

316 SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ................321

▫ Tip Start Feature ......................322

▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................322

▫ Cold Weather Operation ................323

▫ Extended Park Starting..................324

▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . . .325

▫ Stopping The Engine ...................325

▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” —

If Equipped..........................326

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .326

䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) ............327

▫ Auto Park Brake ......................332

▫ SafeHold ...........................332

▫ Brake Service Mode ....................333

䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...............334

▫ Shifting.............................336

▫ Downshifting ........................337

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............339

▫ Shift Lever ..........................341

▫ Gear Ranges .........................343

▫ Transmission Limp Home Mode ...........349

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............350

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System. . . .350

䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .........351

▫ Activation...........................352

▫ Setting A Desired Speed .................352

▫ Deactivation .........................353

▫ Resume Speed........................353

▫ Varying The Speed.....................353

▫ Accelerating For Passing ................355

䡵 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE — JEEP ACTIVE DRIVE

(4WD) AND JEEP ACTIVE DRIVE LOW

(4WD LOW)...........................355

▫ Four Wheel Drive (4x4) .................356

䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN .......................358

▫ Mode Selection Guide ..................358

䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)

WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED .......360

▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With

Mitigation Operation — If Equipped .......360

▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............363

▫ Changing FCW Sensitivity ...............364

▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................364

▫ Service FCW Warning ..................365

▫ Precautions While Driving With FCW .......366

▫ General Information ...................370

䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............370

▫ LaneSense Operation ...................370

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............371

▫ LaneSense Warning Message..............372

▫ Changing LaneSense Status ..............380

䡵 REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........381

▫ Rear ParkSense Sensors .................381

▫ Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense .....383

▫ Service The Rear ParkSense System .........384

▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........385

䡵 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . .386

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .389

▫ Base System .........................392

▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........395

▫ General Information....................400

䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................400

▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine .....................400

▫ 2.4L Engine ..........................401

▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................401

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............402

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......402

▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................403

▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................403

▫ Fuel System Cautions...................404

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............405

䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................405

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................409

▫ Certification Label ....................409

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................411

䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................412

▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range ...........412

▫ Driving Through Water .................412

▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........413

▫ Hill Climbing ........................414

▫ Traction Downhill .....................415

▫ After Driving Off-Road .................415

䡵 POWER STEERING .....................416

䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................417

▫ Common Towing Definitions .............417

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............420

▫ Trailer Towing Weights

(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........421

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............422

▫ Towing Requirements ..................423

▫ Towing Tips .........................428

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING ................430

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .430

▫ Recreational Towing....................431

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the

inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if

present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat

belts.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. A

child could operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or

PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any

driving range.

Manual Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the shift

lever in the NEUTRAL position.

2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without pressing the

accelerator.

3. Cycle the ignition to the AVV/START position and

release it as soon as the engine is started.

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the

STOP/OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds before

attempting to restart the engine.

Automatic Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the shift

lever in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.

2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accel-

erator.

3. Cycle the ignition to the AVV/START position and

release it as soon as the engine is started.

4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the

STOP/OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds before

attempting to restart the engine.

Tip Start Feature

Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch

briefly to the AVV/START position and release it. The

starter motor will continue to run but will automatically

disengage when the engine is running.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure,

and has not experienced an extended park condition as

identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure it may

be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than

15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the

engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the MAR/

RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat

the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously

crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.

Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster

cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster

battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type

of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer

to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for

further information.

Cold Weather Operation

To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions

an externally powered electric block heater (available

from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine

below -29°F (-34°C) and is recommended for the 2.4L

engine below -20°F (-29°C).

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low

temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking

when the ambient temperature is less than -34°F (-35°C)

and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an

engine block heater has not been used. The message

“plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instru-

ment cluster when the ambient temperature is below -4°F

(-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to

avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.

Extended Park Starting

NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle

has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery

to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it

when the engine starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the

ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five

seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the

Extended Park Starting procedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow

the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat

the procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-

tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10

to 15 seconds before trying again.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

After Starting — Warming Up The Engine

Proceed as follows:

• Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM,

without accelerating suddenly.

• It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant

temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum perfor-

mance.

Stopping The Engine

Vehicles Equipped With A Mechanical Key Fob:

To turn off the engine with, proceed as follows:

1. Park the car in a position that does not cause a traffic

hazard.

2. Place the transmission in gear (models with a manual

transmission) or place the transmission in PARK (P)

(models with automatic transmission).

3. With the engine idling, place the ignition in the

STOP/OFF position.

4. Remove the key from the ignition when the engine is

shut off.

Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter-

N-Go):

To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than

5 mph (8 km/h) you must push and hold the ignition or

push the START/STOP button three times consecutively

within a few seconds. The engine will shut down and the

ignition will be placed in the RUN position.

Turning Off the car (placing the ignition from the RUN

position to the STOP position), the power supply to the

accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.

Opening the driver side door with the ignition RUN will

sound a short chime, to remind the driver to place the

ignition to STOP.

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, the

window switches remains active for three minutes.

Opening a front door will cancel this function.

After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tem-

perature inside the engine compartment to cool before

shutting off the engine.

Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped

This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool

the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending

on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump

will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been

shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.

Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-

tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining And Caring

For Your Vehicle.”

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil

in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its

first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and

not interpreted as a problem.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake

System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some

additional features that make the parking brake more

convenient and useful.

The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the

vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the

vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

The EPB switch is located in the center console.

You can engage the EPB in two ways;

• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.

• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-

ture in the customer programmable features section of

the Uconnect settings or in “Safe Hold” conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch

momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from

the back of the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the

parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning

lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the

switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal

while you apply the EPB, you may notice a small amount

of brake pedal movement. The EPB can be applied even

when the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position

but the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, how-

ever, it can only be released when the ignition switch is in

the MAR/RUN position.

NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB

switch is held for longer than 10 seconds (static condi-

tions) or 30 seconds (dynamic conditions) in either the

released or applied position. The light will extinguish

upon releasing the switch.

If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will

automatically engage whenever the transmission is

moved into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when

the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your

foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount

of brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.

Electric Park Brake Switch

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

The electric park brake will be automatically released if

the driver’s seat belt is buckled and driver’s intention to

start (in forward or reverse direction) is recognized by the

system

To release the EPB manually, the ignition switch must be

in the MAR/RUN position. Put your foot on the brake

pedal, then push the EPB switch down momentarily. You

may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the car

while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice

a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once

the EPB is fully disengaged, The BRAKE warning lamp

in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the

switch will extinguish.

NOTE:

• When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the EPB

before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the

load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.

The EPB should always be applied whenever the

driver is not in the vehicle.

• If the clutch pedal is released at the same time the gas

pedal is pressed, the EPB will be automatically re-

leased (manual transmissions only).

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

•

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob

from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped

with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the

keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the

Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in

PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll

and cause damage or injury.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with

the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-

tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to

engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, maintain

upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as

engagement is desired. The brake warning lamp could

illuminate in case of the hydraulic system is not available.

The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automati-

cally while the vehicle remains in motion.

To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion,

release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete

stop using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches approxi-

mately 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain engaged.

WARNING!

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,

or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the

vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake sys-

tem; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a

collision.

In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system,

a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be

accompanied by the Brake warning lamp flashing. In this

status some EPB functionalities may be deactivated. In

this event, urgent service of the EPB system is required.

Do not rely on the EPB to hold the vehicle stationary.

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

Auto Park Brake

The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically

whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h)

and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or

with a manual transmission, whenever the ignition

switch is in the STOP/OFF position. Auto Park Brake is

enabled and disabled by customer selection through the

Customer Programmable Features section of the

Uconnect Settings.

Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed

by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while

the transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmis-

sion) and the ignition is in the MAR/RUN position.

SafeHold

SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will

engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left

unsecured while the ignition switch is in MAR/RUN.

For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically

engage if all of the following conditions are met:

• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).

• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or

accelerator pedal.

• The seat belt is unbuckled.

• The driver door is open.

• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.

For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically

engage if all of the following conditions are met:

• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).

• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or

accelerator pedal.

• The clutch pedal is not pressed.

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The seat belt is unbuckled.

• The driver door is open.

SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the

EPB Switch while the driver door is open and the brake

pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will

be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph

(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the STOP/OFF

position and back to MAR/RUN again.

Brake Service Mode

We recommend having your brakes serviced by your

authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for

which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.

You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake

service.

When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for

you or your technician to push the rear piston into the

rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this

can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The

actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the

Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in

your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you

through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in

order to perform rear brake service.

Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order

to be activated:

• The vehicle must be at a standstill.

• The parking brake must be disabled.

• The transmission must be in park or neutral.

• The EPB switch not activated.

• The vehicle in ignition MAR/ON position.

• The brake pedal not pressed.

While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash

continuously while the ignition switch is MAR/ON.

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the EVIC if

Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.

When brake service work is complete, the following steps

must be followed to reset the parking brake system to

normal operation:

• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.

• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.

• Apply the EPB Switch.

NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the EVIC if

Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which

you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended without having the parking

brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-

ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,

especially on an incline.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch

pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the

clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause

abnormal wear on the clutch.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-

creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid

warms up. This is normal.

To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the floor and

put the shift lever to the desired position (the diagram for

the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of

the lever).

To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position

lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and

simultaneously move the lever to the left and then

forward.

REVERSE Ring

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you

release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator

pedal.

You should always use first gear when starting from a

standing position.

Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel

economy and performance, it should be upshifted as

listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the

vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily

loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift

speeds may not apply.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

All Engines Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)

Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Downshifting

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is

recommended to preserve brakes when driving down

steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time

provides better acceleration when you desire to resume

speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to

avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip, and the vehicle could skid.

CAUTION!

• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears

at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine

and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower

gear with clutch pedal depressed may result dam-

age to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear

and releasing the clutch may result in engine

damage.

• When descending a hill, be very careful to down-

shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the

engine which can cause engine damage, and/or

clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to

cause engine and clutch damage are significantly

lower.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Failure to follow the maximum recommended

downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage

and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal

is pressed.

• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal

depressed could result in clutch damage.

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-

shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed

and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch

pedal is pressed.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1

Maximum

Speed

80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift

at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may

cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is

selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to

the clutch and the transmission can result from

skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting

at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal

is held pressed (i.e., not released).

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel

efficient nine-speed transmission.

The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed beside

the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). To select

a gear range, push the lock button on the shift lever and

move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press

the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to

shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the

vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to

⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this sec-

tion). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

WARNING! (Continued)

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in RE-

VERSE. You could lose control of the vehicle and

hit someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

turn the engine STOP/OFF, and remove the Key

Fob. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF (key

removal) position, the transmission is locked in

PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted

movement.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, remove the

Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the MAR/RUN position. A

child could operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle

speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

Shift Lever

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.

Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift

control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further

information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or

rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the

DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission

gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument

cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,

REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-

ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position

(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the

transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the

instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into

the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,

and NEUTRAL.

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating. The first few shifts on a new vehicle may

be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and

precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers).

The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet

the needs of FCA current and future lineup of FWD/

AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to

optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel

economy. By design, some vehicle and drive-line combi-

nations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving

situations and conditions.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

CAUTION!

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

Shift Lever Lock Button

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gear Ranges

PARK (P)

This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB) by

locking the transmission. The engine can be started in

this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle

is in motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the vehicle in

this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the EPB.

When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the

transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the trans-

mission locking mechanism may make it difficult to

move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-

tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill

grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

Electric Parking Brake (EPB). Always apply the

EPB fully when parked to guard against vehicle

movement and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to

move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in RE-

VERSE. You could lose control of the vehicle and

hit someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

EPB, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the

engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the

ignition is in the STOP/OFF (key removal) posi-

tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing

the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, remove the

Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the MAR/RUN position. A

child could operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you

must turn the ignition switch from the STOP/OFF

position to the MAR/RUN position, and also press

the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift

lever could result.

(Continued)

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• When shifting into PARK, press the LOCK button on

the shift lever and firmly move the shift lever all the

way forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With the brake pedal released, verify that the shift

lever will not move out of PARK.

Reverse (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

Neutral (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the electric park brake and

shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the

vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for

further information.

Drive (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or

while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift

control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further

information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-

tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and

extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting

and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the

transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,

and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch

engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-

age due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-

mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and

the transmission may operate differently until the trans-

mission cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque

converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are

inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal

operation will resume once the transmission temperature

has risen to a suitable level.

AutoStick

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature

providing manual shift control, giving you more control

of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine

braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,

and improve overall vehicle performance. This system

can also provide you with more control during passing,

city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,

trailer towing and many other situations.

Operation

When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside

the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and

rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the

transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever

forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an

upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only

shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever

rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.

• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-

essary to prevent engine over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the

vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will

display the current gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first

or second gear (depending on model) when coming to

a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift

(+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out (from a stop) in first or second gear.

Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snow or

icy conditions. Tap the shift lever forward or rearward

to select the desired gear after the vehicle is brought to

a stop.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to

over-speed, that shift will not occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low

of a vehicle speed.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged

because the transmission will not shift automatically.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick is enabled.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a

fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the

DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick

position at any time without taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is electronically monitored for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains

in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is

selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue

to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-

aging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the STOP/OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized

dealer service is required.

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

Key Ignition Park Interlock

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go:

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition can be turned to the STOP/OFF

position. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK when-

ever the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position.

Vehicles With Mechanical Key:

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition can be turned to the STOP/OFF (key

removal) position. The key can only be removed from the

ignition when the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position,

and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the

ignition is in the STOP/OFF position.

If the vehicle’s battery becomes discharged, the key will

be trapped in the ignition switch even when the shift

lever is in PARK. To extract the key, refer to “Ignition Key

Removal Override” in “In Case Of Emergency”.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK

unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission

out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the

MAR/RUN position (engine running or not) and the

brake pedal must be pressed.

The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the

button on the shift lever to shift from NEUTRAL into

DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or

moving at low speeds.

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL

2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL

3 — RESUME

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

NOTE:

• In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic

Speed Control System has been designed to shut down

if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the

same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the de-

sired vehicle set speed.

• The Electronic Speed Control function will not work in

4WD Low Range.

Activation

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed

Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,

push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

Setting A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)

button.

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the

SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the

accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected

speed.

Deactivation

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the

vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-

out erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button

and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h).

Varying The Speed

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the SET + button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the

Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-

tings” in Multimedia” for more information. The speed

increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit

of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET - button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the

Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed

increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit

of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

Accelerating For Passing

Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE — JEEP ACTIVE DRIVE

(4WD) AND JEEP ACTIVE DRIVE LOW (4WD

LOW)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer

Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with no driver

inputs or additional driving skills required. Under nor-

mal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of

the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,

power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The

greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the

power transfer to the rear wheels.

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle

input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be

sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle

launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!

All wheels must have the same size and type tires.

Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire

size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

Four Wheel Drive (4x4)

The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal

driving mode.

NOTE: It is not possible to carry out the change of mode

when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph

(120 km/h).

Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)

The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are

located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to

select the following:

• 4WD LOCK

• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)

Active Drive Control — If Equipped

The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure

immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles.

This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in

the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by

the following ways:

• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.

Selec-Terrain Switch

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO

to any other off-road modes.

Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk models

only)

The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road

performance in all modes. To enable 4WD Low please

follow the steps below:

Enabling 4WD LOW

With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the MAR/

RUN or with the engine running, shift the transmission

into DRIVE, REVERSE or NEUTRAL and push the but-

ton once 4WD LOW. The EVIC/DID will display the

message ⬙4WD LOW⬙ once the shift is complete.

NOTE:

• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then

become active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the

shift is complete.

• The EVIC display will illuminate the ⬙4WD Low⬙ icon.

Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

Disabling 4WD LOW

To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be

stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.

Push the 4WD LOW button once.

SELEC-TERRAIN

Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle

control systems, along with driver input, to provide the

best performance for all terrains.

Mode Selection Guide

Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.

Selec-Terrain Switch

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continu-

ous operation, is fully automatic and can be used on

and off road. This mode balances traction to ensure

maneuverability and acceleration improvement com-

pared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode

also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows the

disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions permit.

• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability

under conditions of bad weather. For use on and off

road on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads

covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending

on certain operating conditions), the transmission may

use second gear (rather than first gear) during

launches, to minimize wheel slippage.

• SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with

poor traction, such as sandy bottoms. The transmission

is set to provide maximum traction.

• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with

poor traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet

grass.

Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available

in 4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to

maximize traction and allow the highest steering ca-

pacity for off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the

maximum performance off-road. Use for low speed

obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.

NOTE:

• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped

with the Off-Road package.

• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed

Control for steep downhill control. See “Electronic

Brake Control System” in this section for further

information.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH

MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation

Operation — If Equipped

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with

mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,

visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply

a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential

frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are

intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,

avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• FCW monitors the information from the forward look-

ing sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller

(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward colli-

sion. When the system determines that a forward

collision is probable, the driver will be provided with

audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake

jerk warning.

• If the driver does not take action based upon these

progressive warnings, then the system will provide a

limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle

and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the

driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the

system determines that the driver intends to avoid the

collision by braking but has not applied sufficient

brake force, the system will compensate and provide

additional brake force as required.

Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end of

the intervention of automatic braking, the engine could

stall, unless the driver can depress the clutch pedal.

Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end of

the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission

may remain in last gear stored: therefore the car could

lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds

later. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation

event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold

the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release

the brakes.

If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event

begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system

may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate

the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision

Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-

pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for

two seconds and then release the brakes.

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle

in front of you is no longer probable, the warning

message will be deactivated.

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 4 mph

(7 km/h).

• The maximum speed for FCW activation is 124 mph

(200 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than

vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the

course prediction. This is expected and is a part of

normal FCW activation and functionality.

• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If

the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should

be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the

surroundings.

• If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the FCW system

will be automatically deactivated.

FCW Message

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The active braking is enabled only if the front seat belts

are fastened.

• The active braking is disabled when a trailer is con-

nected with a Mopar Trailer Towing system. If the

vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket system, it is

recommended that the Active Braking is turned off

manually.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to

avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect

every type of potential collision. The driver has the

responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the

vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow

this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF

The forward collision menu setting is located in the

Uconnect settings.

NOTE: The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active

Braking,” this allows the system to warn you of a

possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and

enable the active braking.

• Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the

system, so no warning or active braking will be

available in case of a possible collision

• Changing the FCW status to “Only warning” prevents

the system from providing limited active braking, or

additional brake support if the driver is not braking

adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,

but maintains the audible and visual warnings.

Changing the status of the system is only possible with

the vehicle at a complete stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

NOTE: The FCW system state is not kept in memory

from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned

OFF, it will turn On when the vehicle is restarted.

Changing FCW Sensitivity

By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect

system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by

choosing one of the following three options: ⬙Near⬙,

⬙Medium⬙ or ⬙Far⬙. Refer to “Multimedia” for further

information.

The default option is ⬙Medium⬙. This setting provides

that the system notify the driver of a possible accident

with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a

standard distance, intermediate between the other two

possible settings.

By setting the sensitivity of the system to ⬙Far⬙, the

system will warn the driver of a possible accident with

the vehicle in front when the latter is at a greater distance,

giving you the chance to act on the brakes in a more

limited and gradual. This setting gives the driver the

maximum possible time of reaction to prevent a possible

accident.

By changing the option to ⬙Near⬙, the system will warn

the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of

it when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers

a reaction time to the driver lower than the settings

⬙Medium⬙ and ⬙Far⬙, in the case of a potential accident,

while a more dynamic driving of the car.

The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained

in memory when the engine is switched off.

FCW Limited Warning

If the EVIC/DID displays “FCW Limited Functionality”

or “FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front Windshield”

momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW

functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under

normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully

available. Once the condition that limited the system

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

performance is no longer present, the system will return

to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see

your authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:

• FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although

the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have

the system checked by an authorized dealer.

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warn-

ing

The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”

warning will display when conditions temporarily limit

system performance. This most often occurs at times of

poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system

may also become temporarily blinded due to obstruc-

tions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the

EVIC/DID will display “FCW Front Radar Sensor Tem-

porarily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.

The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”

message can sometimes be displayed while driving in

highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or

ice and snow). The system will recover after the vehicle

has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the

radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path

this warning may temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of

an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the lower

grille. In absence of visible obstructions on the bumper, it

could be necessary to wipe off the radar directly on the

surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s rec-

ommended that your authorized dealer perform’s this

operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

NOTE:

• If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”

message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on

every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other

obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your

authorized dealer.

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-

market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-

mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit

FCW operation.

Precautions While Driving With FCW

In certain driving conditions, such as:

• Driving in the vicinity of a curve

• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane

• Lane changing of other vehicles

• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection

The intervention of the system could be unexpected or

delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular

attention, while maintaining control of the car to drive in

complete safety.

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve

Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect

the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the car, but that

does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as this,

the system might respond.

Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane

The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles

that are in front of the car but placed outside the field of

action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react in

the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or motor-

cycles.

Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles

Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while standing in the

traffic lane of their car and inside the field of action of the

radar sensor may cause the intervention of the system.

Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection

The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that

crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming

intersection.

Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles

Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency

that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by

other than an authorized service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

LaneSense Operation

The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above

37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The

LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to

detect lane markings and measure vehicle position

within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver

unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal

applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-

ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to

prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the

lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning

through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver

to remain within the lane boundaries.

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by

applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected and the

driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no

turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a

visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the

driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane

marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be

provided.

NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the

LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are

on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning

to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on

the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver

does not return their hands to the wheel.

Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF

The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel

below the Uconnect display.

To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the

LaneSense button (LED turns on). A “Lane Sense

On” message is shown in the EVIC/DID.

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense

button once (LED turns off).

NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system

state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the

ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

LaneSense Warning Message

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift

condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).

3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines are gray

when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected

and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense

indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-

ing has been detected and the system is ready to

provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an uninten-

tional lane departure occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left

thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indi-

cator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure when only the right

lane marking has been detected.

Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick

Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn

from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane

markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator

is solid green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual

warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-

curs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-

tion, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn

solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from

solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is

applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction

of the lane boundary.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left

thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indi-

cator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At

this time, torque is applied to the steering wheel in the

opposite direction of the lane boundary.

Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin

Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure.

7.0 DID Screen — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines are gray

when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected

and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.

Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,

Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense

indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-

ing has been detected and the system is ready to

provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional

lane departure occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin

line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator

changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure when only the right

lane marking has been detected.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn

from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane

markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator

is solid green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual

warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-

curs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-

tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid

yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid

green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to

the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane

boundary.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left

thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator

changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this

time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the

opposite direction of the lane boundary.

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow

Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure.

Changing LaneSense Status

The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity

of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity

(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect

system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-

dia” for further information.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph

(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).

• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.

• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel

whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,

traction control system, electronic stability control,

forward collision warning, etc.).

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear ParkSense system provides visual and audible

indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a

detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking

maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions

for limitations of this system and recommendations.

Rear ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled

or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition

is changed to the MAR/RUN position.

Rear ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is

in REVERSE.

Rear ParkSense Sensors

The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in the rear

fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that

is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59

inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the

horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and

orientation of the obstacle.

Parking Sensors

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

Chime

By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the case of the

presence of a rear obstacle, an acoustic signal that varies

with the distance of the obstacle from the bumper is

activated.

The frequency of the acoustic signal:

• Increases with the distance between car and object

decreases.

• Becomes continuous when the distance that separates

the car from the obstacle is less than approximately 12

inches (30 cm), while terminates immediately if the

distance to the obstacle increases.

• Remains constant if the distance between car and

obstacle remains unchanged. If this situation occurs

for the side sensors, the signal is stopped after approxi-

mately three seconds to avoid, for example, it activates

in case of maneuver along a wall.

When the system emits a beeping sound, the volume of

the Uconnect system, if turned on, is automatically

lowered by Rear ParkSense.

Detection Distances

If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is taken into

account only what is the shorter distance.

Instrument Cluster Display

Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster

only if you have selected the item ⬙beep and display⬙

inside the ⬙Settings⬙ menu of the Uconnect system.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the

display will show a single solid arc in the center rear

region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will

show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the

sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

In general, the car is closest to the obstacle when the

display shows only a flashing arc and the chime becomes

continuous.

The color on the display depends on the distance and

location of the obstacle.

Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense

Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

Rear ParkSense switch.

When the Rear ParkSense switch is pressed to

disable the system, the instrument cluster will

display the “PARKSENSE DISABLED” message

for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”

for further information. When the shift lever is moved to

REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will

display the “PARKSENSE DISABLED” message for as long

as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Rear

ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The Rear

ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is

enabled. If the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and

requires service, the Rear ParkSense switch LED will

blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Rear ParkSense will remember the previous state when

the vehicle is switch off.

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

CAUTION!

After turning off the ignition, the Rear ParkSense

remains in this setting until the next key cycle, even

in the case of changing the setting of starting MAR/

RUN to STOP/OFF and then again in MAR/RUN.

Service The Rear ParkSense System

During vehicle start up, when the Rear ParkSense System

has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster

will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it

will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID)” for further information. When the shift

lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected

a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display the

⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙

or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under

this condition, Rear ParkSense will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-

SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make

sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear

fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt

or other obstructions and then cycle the ignition. If the

message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the

rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt

or other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense system

operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of Rear ParkSense.

• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking

care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must

not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or

debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not

working properly. The Rear ParkSense system might

not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it

could provide a false indication that an obstacle is

behind the fascia/bumper.

• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be

placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can

result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a

sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be

displayed in the instrument cluster.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

•

The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an

obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver

looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using ParkSense. Always check carefully

behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure

to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for safety and must continue to

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false

indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball

assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter

out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly presence in

sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be

performed only by an authorized dealer.

REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an

on-screen image of your vehicle’s rear surroundings

when the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will

be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a

note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the

screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The

camera is located above the rear license plate.

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be

displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition

is switched to the STOP/OFF position.

A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available

when the vehicle is not in REVERSE. Display of the

camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be

disabled via Uconnect Settings.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its

projected backup path based on the steering wheel

position.

When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of

the vehicle.

Parking Camera

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

The following table shows the approximate distances for

each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,

and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check care-

fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

blind spots before backing up. You are responsible

for the safety of your surroundings and must con-

tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do

so can result in serious injury or death.

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera

should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear

Back Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or

object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using the Rear Back Up Cam-

era to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is

seen. It is recommended that the driver look fre-

quently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear

Back Up Camera.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-

mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means

that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire

pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set

based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as

the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for

at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure

must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded

into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-

tion” in “Starting And Operating” for information on

how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire

pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is

normal and there should be no adjustment for this

increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects

and natural pressure loss through the tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-

ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,

you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended

cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update and the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the

system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle

may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-

tion.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire

pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause

the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),

but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still

be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-

eration or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-

come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire

sealant it is recommended that you take your

vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire

failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-

flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure

gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light”.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” message will display in the instru-

ment cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed

and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one

or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur,

you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation

pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the

system receives the updated tire pressures, the system

will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Telltale Light” will turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off

when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault

can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full

Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare

tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.

Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in

the spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size

spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will

sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on

upon the next ignition cycle.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound

and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update

automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn

off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-

pressure warning limit in any of the four active road

tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20

minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

Premium System — If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime

will sound when tire pressure is low in one or

more of the four active road tires. In addition, the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver in-

formation Display (DID) will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ mes-

sage for a minimum of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙

message and a graphic showing the pressure values of

each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different

color.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a

different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s

recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in

the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the

updated tire pressures, the system will automatically

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the

EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

SERVICE TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will

display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-

mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in

place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not

being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure

value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault

can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare

1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly

has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be

monitored by the TPMS.

2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire

that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale

Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In

addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low

message, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic

showing the low tire pressure value in a different

color.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the

low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active

road tires.

4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire

pressure value in the same color as the other pressure

values in place of the different color low tire pressure

value. The EVIC/DID will also display a “SPARE

LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to service

the flat tire.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full

Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does

not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,

the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact

spare tire.

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size

spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next

ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the

graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different

color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SER-

VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and

then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off

for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the

EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”

message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -)

in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update

automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light”

will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will

display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as

long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure

warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

1.4L Turbo Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emis-

sion regulations and provide satisfactory

fuel economy and performance when us-

ing high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gaso-

line having an octane rating of 87 using the

(R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance and fuel

economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

2.4L Engine

All available gasoline engines are designed

to meet all emissions regulations and pro-

vide excellent fuel economy and perfor-

mance when using high quality unleaded

“regular” gasoline having a octane rating

of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of premium

gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any

benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-

proved performance and durability of engine and fuel

system components.

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of

these blends may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system components,

cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,

and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to

illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they

should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater

than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more

than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol

are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may

void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-

line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)

is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal

and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

that have these additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-

mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-

tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in

minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-

able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-

mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should

be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket

and diaphragm materials.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-

formance and damage the emissions control sys-

tem.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-

vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations

of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such

fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer and may void or not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against

you.

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal

conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive

with all side windows fully open.

ADDING FUEL

The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler

pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically

upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.

The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents

the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

Opening The Door

For filling proceed as follows:

• Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the

indentation point indicated by the arrow.

• Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed

with filling the fuel tank.

• Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds to

allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank.

• Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the

door.

Fuel Filler Door

Filling Procedure

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

Emergency Refueling Procedure

If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:

• Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill

funnel located in the cargo area.

Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel

Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel – If Equipped with Full Size

Spare Tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

• Open the fuel door.

• Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the filler pipe

and proceed to fill the fuel tank.

• Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and close the

door.

• Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the cargo area.

WARNING!

• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler

neck other than is provided on the car.

• The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the

vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside the

tank, creating dangerous conditions.

• Do not approach the neck of the tank with open

flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard.

Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with

your face, do not inhale harmful vapors.

• Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the

pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of fire.

Fueling with Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load

weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the

driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo

area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the

system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-

creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and

rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined

by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should

then be determined separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-

ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the

front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is

within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted

from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the

specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,

parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to

lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of

your vehicle.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a

narrower track to make them capable of performing in a

wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design

characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.

They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than

low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-

rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp

turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover.

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

When To Use 4WD LOW Range

When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional

traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,

ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase

low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and

Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further

details). This range should be limited to extreme situa-

tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional

low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in

excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in

4WD LOW range.

Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

water, there are a number of precautions that must be

considered before entering the water:

CAUTION!

When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering

as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-

ing through water may cause damage that may not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must

drive through water, try to determine the depth and the

bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to

entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady

controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water

to minimize wave effects.

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

Flowing Water

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)

avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the

flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid

depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water can

erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into

deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream

of your entry point to allow for drifting.

Standing Water

Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches

(48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize

wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of

water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Maintenance

After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle

fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Trans-

fer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not

been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants

(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed

as soon as possible to prevent component damage.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional

control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low

gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain

mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-

Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than

necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine

can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.

Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-

cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of

control.

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

Hill Climbing

NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the

conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.

Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a

lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use

first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a

steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and

immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and

shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the

compression braking of the engine to help regulate your

speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,

apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the

tires.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never

attempt to turn around. To do so may result in

tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight

down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back

down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.

NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill -

drive straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a

hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by

turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may

provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually

provide traction to complete the climb.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction Downhill

Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD

System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent

Control if equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control

System⬙ in this section for further information). Let the

vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels

turning against engine compression drag. This will per-

mit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.

When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking

can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid

repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-

sion whenever possible.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you

can get any problems taken care of right away and have

your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the

values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These

things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and

propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake

rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected

and cleaned as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might

not have full braking power when you need it to

prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked

and cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause a

wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will

correct the situation.

POWER STEERING

The electric power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in

tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light

efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the

electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces

assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you

will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose

a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be

obtained as soon as possible.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR

⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE

SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are

displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates

that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.

It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver

Information Display (DID)” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Cluster” for further information.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer

operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.

Under these conditions there will be a substantial

increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and

during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,

follow the requirements and recommendations in this

manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and

ready for operation⬙ condition.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your

fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight

of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-

tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight

is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional

hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your

vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum width of the front of a trailer.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be

installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with

the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer

swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds

of hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized

trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-

age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used

for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the

tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used

in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-

vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle

and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, braking

performance, and could result in a collision.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

WARNING! (Continued)

• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-

ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your

hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-

reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer

Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer

weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

1.4L Turbo Engine

Trailer towing is not recommended.

Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)

2.4L 2,000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo

and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire

Safety Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in

the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your

vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the

rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side

which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.

Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of

many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on

your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must

be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.

Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for

the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo

for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-

train components, the following guidelines are recom-

mended:

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these

guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as

possible:

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and that it will not shift during travel. When

trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic

load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the

driver to control. You could lose control of your

vehicle and have a collision.

• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-

age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure, or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to

the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.

Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow

enough slack for turning corners.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

WARNING! (Continued)

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in

PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-

lized.

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle

or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)

and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps

the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-

ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the

proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-

mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper

tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a

higher load carrying capacity will not increase the

vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake

system and cause it to fail. You might not have

brakes when you need them and could have a

collision.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

WARNING! (Continued)

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing you should allow for addi-

tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a

collision.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-

pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-

ness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins

2 — Male Pin

3 — Ground

4 — Park

5 — Left Stop/Turn

6 — Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

5 — Ground

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,

and backing the trailer in an area located away from

heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The

transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid

frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent

shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the

AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.

NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle

under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-

mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-

sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also

provide better engine braking.

AutoStick

• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the

highest gear that allows for adequate performance and

avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if

the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or

“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous

driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-

sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to

a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road

conditions allow.

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

RECREATIONAL TOWING

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)

FOUR-WHEEL

DRIVE (4WD)

TOWING

CONDITION

WHEELS OFF THE

GROUND

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

MANUAL

TRANSMISSION

MANUAL/

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

FRONT OK OK NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD OK

NOTE:

• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow

applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and

provincial Highway Safety offices for additional de-

tails.

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is

disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-

tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park

Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer

programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing

Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels

are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a

tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer

(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,

follow this procedure:

• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

• Apply the Electronic Parking Brake (EPB). Place the

transmission in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.

• Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

• Turn the ignition to the MAR/RUN position, but do

not start the engine.

• Press and hold the brake pedal.

• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).

• Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key, and release the

brake pedal.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the

drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-

ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the

ground.

• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and

remains released, while being towed.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered un-

der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,

or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle

may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all

four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the

ground can cause severe transmission and/or power

transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing

is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CONTENTS

䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........435

䡵 ASSIST AND 9–1–1 — IF EQUIPPED ........435

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ...................442

▫ General Information....................442

▫ Replacement Bulbs.....................443

▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ................445

▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs .................463

䡵 FUSES ...............................469

▫ General Information....................470

▫ Access To The Fuses ...................471

▫ Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution

Unit ...............................472

▫ Body Computer Fuse Center..............476

▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit.....480

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........483

▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........484

▫ Preparations For Jacking ................486

▫ Jacking Instructions ...................486

▫ Road Tire Installation ...................494

䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE ..............495

▫ Tire Service Kit — If Equipped ............495

䡵 JUMP STARTING ......................499

▫ Preparations For Jump Start ..............500

▫ Jump Starting Procedure ................502

䡵 Enhanced Accident Response System .........504

▫ System Reset Procedure .................504

䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .............506

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............506

䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................507

䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .......509

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............512

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........514

▫ Front Wheel Drive (FWD)................515

▫ Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ................516

䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —

IF EQUIPPED .........................516

434 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the

switch bank below the radio.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

Flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers

may wear down your battery.

ASSIST AND 9–1–1 — IF EQUIPPED

If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST

and a 9-1-1 button.

Driver Assistance Call Buttons

1 — 9–1–1 Button

2 — Assist Button

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 435

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through the

Uconnect Access service. These buttons will only op-

erate as long as your Uconnect Access service is active.

Refer to your “Uconnect Radio supplement” for fur-

ther information.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you

to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a

tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be con-

nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance

will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.

Additional fees may apply for Roadside Assistance.

• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support

for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile

features.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other

vehicle issues.

436 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

9-1-1 Call

1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the overhead console.

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,

there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call

system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the

9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the

overhead console or press the cancellation button on the

Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the

green LED light on the overhead console off.

2. The LED light located on the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons

in the overhead console will turn green once you push

these buttons and will remain on until the call is

ended.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1

operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit

the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1

operator:

• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• The vehicle brand.

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator

through the vehicle audio system to determine if

additional help is needed.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 437

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s

9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1

operator may be able to open a voice connection with

the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.

Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection

with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator

should be able to speak with you or other vehicle

occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.

The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-

main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the

9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.

5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergency responders and provide them with impor-

tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,

fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions

or location), do not wait for voice contact from a

9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle

immediately and move to a safe location.

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-

cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket

electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a

signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-

ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,

never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way

mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your

vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas

on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-

TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING

(Continued)

438 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued)

DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE

UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,

AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system

could cause the air bag system to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air bag system

is not there to help protect you.

9-1-1 Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1

Call system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and

Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.

If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the

following may occur at the time the malfunction is

detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The overhead console lights located on the Assist and

9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.

• The Device Screen will display the following message

“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your

dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-

vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons light could

mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the

Assist and 9-1-1 buttons light is illuminated, have

an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system

immediately.

(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 439

WARNING! (Continued)

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on

the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel

if a malfunction in any part of the system is

detected. If the air bag Warning Light is illumi-

nated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC

system immediately.

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors

beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the

9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not

limited to, the following factors:

• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition

and the delayed accessories mode is active.

• The ignition key is in STOP/OFF position.

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are

damaged during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-

nected during a vehicle crash.

• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or

Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or

obstructed.

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.

• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network conges-

tion.

• Weather.

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

440 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable

1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS anten-

nas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or

3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can

prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.

Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and

GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call

system to function properly.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 441

BULB REPLACEMENT

General Information

• Before you replace a bulb check the contacts to be sure

they are not oxidized.

• Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.

• After replacing a light bulb always check the correct

orientation.

• Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning check

that the fuse is intact.

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric

conditions change to allow the condensation to change

back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually

accelerate the clearing process.

442 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs

Lamps Bulb Number

Front Courtesy Light C5W

Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W

Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W

Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W

Interior Lights W5W

Dome Light (Glove Box) W5W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 443

Exterior Bulbs

Lamps Bulb Number

Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13

Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL ) P21/5W

Front Direction Indicator Lamps PY21W

Front Fog Lamps H11

Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W

Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Reverse W16W

License Plate Lamp W5W

444 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

Headlamps

Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Open the engine compartment and remove the head-

lamp bulb cap.

Headlamp Bulb Cap

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 445

2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise

then pull outwards.

3. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connec-

tor and remove the bulb and socket.

Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb Connector

446 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is

properly locked.

5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it clockwise

making sure it is properly locked.

WARNING!

Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with

the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold,

to avoid the danger of burns.

Headlamp Bulb

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 447

Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog Lights

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Turn the front wheels completely.

2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.

Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access

1 — Screws

2 — Access Door

448 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Remove the electrical connectors. 4.

Rotate in a counterclockwise direction (on the left-hand

socket) or in a clockwise direction (on the right-hand

socket) and remove the bulb and bulb socket.

Electrical Connectors

Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly

1 — DRL Bulb Socket

2 — Turn Signal Bulb Socket

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 449

5. To replace the bulb gently push bulb and rotate

counterclockwise.

6. Insert the new bulb by pushing on it and turning it

clockwise. Make sure the bulb is correctly locked in

place.

7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise

(right side) and clockwise (left side), making sure that

it is properly locked.

8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.

9. Reinstall the access door.

Bulb and Socket Assembly

1 — Bulb

2 — Rotate Bulb

450 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Front Fog Lights

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Turn the front wheels completely.

2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.

Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access

1 — Screws

2 — Access Door

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 451

3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the

electrical connector.

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the

bulb.

5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb

is locked into place.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall the access door.

Fog Light Assembly

1 — Bulb Socket

2 — Electrical Connector

3 — Bulb

452 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Side Indicators

Front Side Indicators

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

1. Operating from inside the engine compartment using

a suitable tool release the retaining clip.

2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward the out-

side.

Lamp Retaining Clip

Lamp Assembly

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 453

3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing the tab

then disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb socket

from the lamp assembly, and remove it.

Electrical Connector Bulb Socket

454 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Remove the bulb from the socket

6. Insert the new bulb in the socket.

7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp assembly

by turning it clockwise, making sure it is locked into

place.

8. Reconnect the electrical connector.

9. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the car, making sure it

is locked into place.

Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – (If

Equipped)

CAUTION!

The procedure is described as a guideline. For the

replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you

contact your authorized dealer.

Bulb

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 455

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view

mirror.

Mirror Cap

Removing the mirror cap

456 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown. 3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent

lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.

Transparent Lens

Transparent Lens Assembly

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 457

4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the

bulb straight out.

5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into

place

6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens assembly.

7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,

making sure it is locked into place.

Rear Tail Lamps

Contain the following:

• Position lights

• Stop lights

• Direction indicator

• REVERSE lights

Bulb And Socket Assembly

1 — Bulb

2 — Bulb Socket

458 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as shown.

3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the

release.

Trim Panel Door

Rear Lamp Fastener and Electrical Connector

1 — Fastener

2 — Electrical Connector

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 459

5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the

outside as shown.

6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear tail lamp

holder.

Tail Lamp Removal

Rear Lamp Assembly

1 — Mounting Screws

460 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

7. Replace the bulb as necessary. 8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked;

9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear tail lamp

housing, tightening the screws.

10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car.

11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and reconnect

the electrical connector.

12. Reinstall the door making sure of its correct locked

13. Finally close the tailgate.

3th Stop Lamp

The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see your

authorized dealer.

Rear Tail Lamp Holder

1 — Tail Light

2 — Reverse Bulb

3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 461

License Plate Lights

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.

2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.

3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are properly

locked between the contacts.

4. Reinstall the license plate lens.

License Plate Light Location

License Plate Light

462 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: If removal the license plate lens using a screw-

driver, be sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver with a

cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle

paint.

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Front Courtesy Light

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light as

shown.

Front Courtesy Light Housing

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 463

2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.

3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb

housing.

4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are

properly locked.

5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light hous-

ing making sure that they are properly locked.

Front Courtesy Bulb Housing

1 — Retaining Clips

2 — Bulb Housing

Front Courtesy Bulb Housing

464 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is

properly locked.

Dome Light Vanity Mirror

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor

mirror light cover.

2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,

and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is

properly locked between the contacts.

3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that

it is properly locked.

4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.

Visor

1 — Visor Mirror Cover

2 — Visor Mirror Light

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 465

Dome Light Glove Compartment

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

1. Open the glove compartment;

2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the

bulb to replace it.

3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.

Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at both

the ends.

2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.

Bulb Removal/Installation

466 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.

4. Reinstall the dome light.

Dome Light — MY SKY

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Lower the handle in the direction shown remove the

dome light.

Rear Dome Light Housing

1 — Bulb

2 — Flap

Retractable Roof Light

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 467

2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.

3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.

4. Reinstall the dome light.

Interior Cargo Lights

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the dome

light assembly.

2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.

Bulb

Light Cover

468 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Close the light cover over the bulb.

4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.

WARNING!

• Before proceeding with the replacement of the

lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER

OF BURNS!

• Modifications or repair of the electrical system

performed incorrectly and without taking into ac-

count the technical characteristics can cause mal-

functions with the risk of fire.

• Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the

event of breakage be careful of the projection of

fragments of glass.

•

Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only

the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact

with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In

case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth

dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.

FUSES

WARNING!

•

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-

priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as

the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another

fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown

fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure

to use proper fuses may result in serious personal

injury, fire and/or property damage.

(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 469

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off

and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

General Information

The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive

current.

When a device does not work you must check the

electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.

Also please be aware that when using power outlets for

extended periods of time with the engine off may result

in vehicle battery discharge.

Blade Fuses

1 — Electrical Circuit

2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit

3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

470 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Fuse Removal

To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse

cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment

fuse cover.

Access To The Fuses

The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the

engine compartment, under the instrument panel and on

the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.

Fuse Extractor Location

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 471

Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit

The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left

side of the engine compartment.

Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities

Fuse Panel & Cover Location

1 — Mounting Screw

2 — Fuse Cover

472 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:

• Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.

• Slowly release the screw.

• Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.

Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:

• Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide com-

pletely from top to bottom.

• Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver

supplied.

• Slowly turn the screw clockwise.

• Release the screw.

Battery Fuse Cover Location

1 — Fuse Cover Tabs

2 — Fuse Cover

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 473

Cavity

Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer

F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer,

Rear Distribution Units

F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body

Computer

F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module

F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering

F06 20 Amp Yellow – – Engine Cooling fan

F07 40 Amp Orange –

1.4 Without A/C

50 Amp Red – 1.4

With A/C And All

2.4 Models

– – Engine Cooling fan

F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM

F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine

F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn

474 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity

Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F11 – – 10 Amp Red –

1.4 Engines

25 Amp Clear –

2.4 Engines

Supply Secondary Loads

F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heater ⬙Blow By⬙

F14 – – 5 Amp Tan Pump Power ⬙After Run⬙

F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump

F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power,

Automatic Transmission

F17 – – 10 Amp Red –

1.4 Engines

15 Amp Blue –

2.4 Engines

Supply Primary Loads

F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow

12V Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered

F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor

F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 475

Cavity

Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump

F22 – – 20 Amp Yellow Power Control Module Engine

F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield – If Equipped

F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic

Transmission

F30 – –

20 Amp Yellow

(Customer Installed)

12V Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Bat-

tery Powered

F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan

F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive

F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Shift Lever Automatic Transmission

F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors

F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window

F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge)

Body Computer Fuse Center

The controller is located at the left side of the steering

column at the bottom of the instrument panel.

For the fuse replacement see your authorized dealer.

476 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Body Controller Fuse Cavities

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 477

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front

Seats/Fan Air Conditioning

F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)

F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)

F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Condi-

tioning, Alarm, Power Folding Outside

Mirrors, USB Port

F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warn-

ing Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC

F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking

F42 7.5 Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key

F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer

F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)

F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)

478 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front

Dome, Mirror, Electric Motor Retract-

able Roof, Heated Front Seats, Stabi-

lizer Battery, ESC System, ESL

F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag

F51 7.5 Amp Brown Alarm Power, Front Courtesy Light,

Air Conditioning Compressor, Brake

Pedal Switch (NC), Plaque Automatic

Transmission, Compass, Rear Camera,

Leveling Headlights, Air Conditioning

F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System

Keyless Enter-N-Go

F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 479

Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit

To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left

rear panel of the rear cargo area.

The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse holder No.

1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and fuse

holder No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) is located

closest to the front of the vehicle.

Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities

1 — Fuse Holder No. 1

2 — Fuse Holder No. 2

480 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Fuse Holder No. 1

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter

F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System

F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY

F4 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat

(Driver Side)

F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)

F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Seat (Driver Side And Pas-

senger Side)

F7 30 Amp Green Lumbar Adjustment Front Seats

(Driver Side And Passenger Side)

F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats

On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun

visor of the retractable roof.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 481

Fuse Holder No. 2

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On

Trailer

F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights

(Drivers Side)

F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights

(Passenger Side)

482 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 483

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and tools are located in the rear storage com-

partment if equipped, inside a special container.

Jack And Tools

1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench

2 — Jack

3 — Emergency Funnel

4 — Wheel Chocks

5 — Screwdriver

6 — Emergency Allen Key

484 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Lift the access cover using the load floor pull strap.

3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.

4. Remove the chocks.

5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.

6. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Load Floor Pull Strap

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 485

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery

areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the Electric Park Brake.

4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-

sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).

5. Turn the ignition off to the STOP/OFF position.

6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite of the jacking position. For

example, if changing the right front

tire, chock the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

(Continued)

486 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued)

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Apply the parking brake and place an automatic

transmission in PARK.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

Jack Warning Label

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 487

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.

2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers

the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the

center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench

to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the

wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-

clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to

the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly

engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill

flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in

the sill cladding.

Jacking Locations

488 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Front Jacking Location Front Jacking Engagement Point

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 489

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.

Rear Jacking Location Rear Jacking Engagement Point

490 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem

facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the

spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Mounting Spare Tire

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 491

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare

tire or a limited — use spare tire. For further infor-

mation refer to “Tires — General Information” in

“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle”.

• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a

center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.

8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the

wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle

has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern

until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer

to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the

proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct

tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench

by your authorized dealer or at a service station.

492 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Properly Stowed Tire

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 493

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded

end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly

tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until

each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Data” sec-

tion for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about

the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque

wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel

chocks. Stow the jack and tools back in the proper

storage location. Release the Electric Park Brake before

driving the vehicle.

6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque

with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are

properly seated against the wheel.

494 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE

The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage com-

partment inside a storage container. Located inside the

container are a screwdriver and the emergency fuel

funnel. To access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and

remove the load floor.

Tire Service Kit — If Equipped

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)

2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

3 — Power Button

4 — Pressure Gauge

5 — Sealant Bottle

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 495

If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency

repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear

storage compartment inside the storage container.

Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be repaired;

the kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not

remove the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e.,

screw or nail.

Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out

from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw

the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit when using

the Tire Service Kit.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

(Continued)

496 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued)

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants

of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in

the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to

you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,

swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes

skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-

ately with plenty of water if there is any contact

with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as

possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician

immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of

children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with

plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not

induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet

socket. Start the vehicle engine.

Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.

The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air

will inflate the tire.

Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached

within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached

turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle

30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the

sealant inside the tire.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 497

Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor

directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.

When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving

the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the

tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If

the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the

vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest

Authorized Dealer.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.

Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after

using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph

(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.

Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries

that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and

others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as

possible at an Authorized Dealer.

If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the

inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and

continue driving.

Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on

the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has

been treated with Tire Service Kit.

WARNING!

The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot

after use, so it should be handled carefully.

NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-

tion date at your authorized dealer.

498 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!

Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,

away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this

WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture

and serious injury or death.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 499

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the

engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

Battery Posts

1 — Positive Battery Post

2 — Negative Battery Post

500 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a

protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the

positive battery post.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent

electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic trans-

mission into PARK (manual transmission in NEU-

TRAL) and turn the ignition to STOP/OFF.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is STOP/

OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 501

Jump Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could

result in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)

post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-

cal spark could cause the battery to explode and

could result in serious injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

502 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables

in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets

draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not

in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough without engine operation,

the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to

degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from

starting.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 503

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position. The

hazard lights flasher can be deactivated by pressing

the hazard flasher button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the

intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.

• Turn Off the HVAC Blower Motor.

• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.

System Reset Procedure

Depending on the nature of the event the left and right

turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may

both be blinking and will continue to blink until the

ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. After an

accident, turn the ignition switch to STOP/OFF position,

check that there aren’t any losses of fuel/liquids. In order

to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must

follow the system reset procedure.

504 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Customer Action Customer Will See

1. Turn ignition OFF.

(Turn Signal Switch Must

be placed in Neutral

State).

2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF.

Right Turn Light

BLINKS.

3. Turn Right Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Right Turn Light is ON

SOLID. Left Turn Light

BLINKS.

4. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Left Turn Light is ON

SOLID. Right Turn Light

BLINKS.

5. Turn Right Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Right Turn Light is ON

SOLID. Left Turn Light

BLINKS.

6. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch ON.

Left Turn Light is ON

SOLID. Right Turn Light

is ON SOLID.

7. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch OFF. (Turn Signal

Switch Must be placed in

Neutral State).

Left Turn Light is OFF.

Right Turn Light is OFF.

8. Turn ignition OFF.

9. Turn Hazard Flashers

OFF (Manually).

System is now reset and

the engine may be

started.

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60

seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the

reset procedure must be performed again in order to be

successful.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 505

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY

The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is de-

scribed in the “Emergency Refueling Procedure”. Refer to

“Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating your engine by taking the

appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in

NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”

pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with

the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the

engine off immediately and call for service.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

506 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use the

following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 507

3. Carefully separate the shift lever bezel and boot

assembly from the center console.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

Shift Lever Bezel Location

Removing Shift Lever Bezel

508 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into

the shift lever override access hole (at the right front

corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold

the override release lever down.

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the shift lever bezel.

IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition switch can be turned to the STOP/

OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually,

proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the vehicle is in a safe location and set the

Electric Park Brake.

2. Unlock the steering column, and pull the tilt/

telescoping control handle down.

Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of the

travel position, then lock the steering column in position

and push the control handle up until fully engaged.

Shift Lever Override Location

1 — Shift Lever Opening

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 509

4. Using the special tool supplied (located in the tool

bag), remove the screws in the lower steering column

trim cover and remove it.

Special Tool

Lower Steering Column Cover

1 — Trim Screws

510 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. With one hand, pull down on the release tab and with

the other, pull out the ignition key.

6. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column

cover.

Release Tab Location

Release Tab Direction

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 511

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it

can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,

push and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then

shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with

automatic transmission) or 2ND GEAR and REVERSE

(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the

accelerator.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that

will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the

wheels or racing the engine.

For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:

Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be

achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.

Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for

more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal

to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place

the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial

Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,

push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙

mode.

512 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead

to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the

engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL

for at least one minute after every five rocking-

motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and

reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure

during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin

the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-

train damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 513

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled

vehicle using a commercial towing service.

FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

Towing

Condition

Wheels

OFF the

Ground

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

MANUAL

TRANSMISSION

AUTOMATIC/MANUAL

TRANSMISSION 4X4

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Wheel Lift

or Dolly

Tow

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front OK OK NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD OK

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers

or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding

vehicles under tow must be observed.

514 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE:

• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical

failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged,

will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels

off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is

disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-

tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park

Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer

programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the MAR/

RUN position. If the key fob is unavailable, or the

vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever

Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the

transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can be

moved.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do

not attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD)

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with

all four wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must

towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a

towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front

wheels raised).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 515

NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,

and remains released, while being towed.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-

age from improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels

OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the

vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised

and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels

on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal

damage to the transmission or power transfer unit

will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when

towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be

one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the

vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side

of the vehicle.

516 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use

both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of

damage to the vehicle.

Vehicles Equipped With RKE Transmitter With An

Integrated Vehicle Key

Turn the ignition key to the MAR/RUN and then STOP/

OFF position, without removing it. By extracting the key

this will automatically engage the steering wheel lock.

Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.

Front Tow Hook Locations

Rear Tow Hook Location

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 517

Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go

Place the ignition in the RUN and subsequently on STOP,

without opening the door. During towing remember that

not having the aid of the power brakes and the electro-

mechanical power steering, greater force is needed in

applying the brakes and steering of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.

Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow

hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-

ing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a

vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for

tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could

damage your vehicle.

518 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............522

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................523

䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................523

䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............524

▫ Maintenance Chart.....................526

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO

ENGINE .............................533

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ENGINE . . . .534

䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........535

▫ Engine Oil ..........................535

▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................538

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................539

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............539

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............540

▫ Body Lubrication .....................542

▫ Wiper Blades ........................542

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................545

▫ Exhaust System ......................545

▫ Cooling System ......................547

▫ Brake System ........................553

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......555

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....556

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion ...........................558

䡵 LIFTING A VEHICLE ...................565

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............567

▫ Tire Markings ........................567

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........570

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........572

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........573

䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........578

▫ Tire Pressure ........................578

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................580

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .581

▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................582

▫ Tire Types ...........................582

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............584

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............585

▫ Tire Spinning ........................585

▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................586

▫ Life Of Tire .........................586

▫ Replacement Tires .....................587

520 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......589

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....590

䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE .................592

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 521

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which

you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the

following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do

not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

522 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you place the ignition in the off

position or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed

to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance

and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-

signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the

use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine

parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by

the manufacturer’s warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 523

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you

have any doubt about your ability to perform a service

job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change

indicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for

scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi-

cator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster. This

means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating

conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and

extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence

when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message

is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the

change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles

(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as

soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350

hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350

hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

524 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle

is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is

operated predominately at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate

under these conditions.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual

wear or damage.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and

brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

Required Maintenance Intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter.

Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.

Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

Check and adjust hand brake.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road

conditions.

Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page

for the required maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 525

Maintenance Chart

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Years 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pres-

sure, if necessary, check TIREKIT expira-

tion date (if provided).

•••••••••••••••

Check operation of lighting system (head-

lamps, direction indicators, hazard warn-

ing lights, luggage compartment, passen-

ger compartment, glove compartment,

instrument panel warning lights, etc.).

•••••••••••••••

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid lev-

els (brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield

washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

•••••••••••••••

526 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Years 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check engine control system operation

(via diagnostic tool).

•••••••••••••••

Visually inspect condition of: exterior

bodywork, underbody protection, pipes

and hoses (exhaust - fuel system -

brakes), rubber elements

(boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.).

•••••••

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade

position/wear.

••••••••

Check operation of windshield washer

system and adjust jets if necessary.

••••••••

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 527

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Years 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate

locks and cleanliness and lubrication of

linkages.

••••••••

Visually check the condition and wear of

the front and rear brakes.

•••••••••••••••

Check the front suspension, tie rods,

CV joints and replace if necessary.

•••••••

Visual inspect the condition of the

accessory drive belt.

•••

Check the tension of the accessory drive

belt.

•••••••

528 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Years 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace the accessory drive belt. •

Inspect and replace PCV valve if

necessary.

•

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (*).

Inspect the PTU fluid level. •••

Inspect the rear differential fluid level. •••

Replace spark plugs

(1.4L Turbo engine). (**)

•••••

Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). (**) •

Replace engine air filter. (#) •••••

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 529

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Years 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace brake fluid every two years. •••••••

Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○

Change the manual transmission fluid if

using your vehicle for any of the following:

trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police,

delivery service (commercial service), off-

road, desert operation or more than 50%

of your driving is at sustained speeds dur-

ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

••

Flush and replace the engine coolant at

10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)

whichever comes first.

••

530 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Years 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace the timing belt

(1.4L Turbo Engine).

•

䡩 Recommend replacement

• Mandatory service

(#) The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil

change if used in dusty areas.

(*) The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out

when indicated by a warning light or message on the

instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year

or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

(**) The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly

intervals do not apply. The following are essential to

ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to

the engine:

• Only use spark plugs of the same make and type

which are specially certified for such engines (refer to

“Engine Information” in “Technical Data” for further

information).

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 531

• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement inter-

val given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark

plug replacement.

• Contact your authorized dealer if you have any ques-

tions.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and

effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

532 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO ENGINE

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 533

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ENGINE

1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Battery 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap

3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Coolant Pressure Bottle

534 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

maintenance schedule, there are other components which

may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized dealer or qualified

repair center.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your

vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-

vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-

nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,

transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-

tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing

procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 535

after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil

level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will

give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and

approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine

is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level

readings. Maintain the oil level between the range mark-

ings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a

crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when

the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will

result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the

engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can

lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased

oil temperature could damage your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

536 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine

For best performance and maximum protection for tur-

bocharged engines under all types of operating condi-

tions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine

oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of

FCA Material Standard MS-12991.

Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends 0W-20 engine oils that are API Certified and

meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-

6395.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo

Engine

MOPAR SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil approved to

FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as Pennzoil, Shell

Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating

temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature

starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine

MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or

equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 537

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

station or governmental agency for advice on how and

where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in

your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-

able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The

quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only

high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil

filters and are recommended.

538 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-

nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance

intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-

mended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

(Continued)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 539

WARNING! (Continued)

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in the “In Case Of

Emergencies” section for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be

replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-

fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should

be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the

start of each warm season. This service should include

540 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-

fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The

manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service

be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and

recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

See your Authorized Dealer for service.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 541

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should

be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,

such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after

lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing

other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-

nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge

or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will

remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and

help reduce streaking and smearing.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield or rear window.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are

not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid

damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact

with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

542 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending

on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-

mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,

water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are

present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

Service Position Strategy

The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed

in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily

changed.

To enable the Service Position Strategy the wipers must

be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the

STOP/OFF position.

Service mode must be activated within two minutes after

the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.

To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service

Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least

half a second.

At every valid activation of Service Position command,

the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.

The Service Position command can be repeated several

times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to

a maximum of three times.

After three subsequent activations the strategy is dis-

abled.

Function Deactivation:

The functionality is reset if:

• Turn the ignition to the MAR/RUN position.

• Number of subsequent activations is three.

• Two minutes timer has expired after turning the

ignition OFF.

NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go

into the parking position.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 543

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper

blade off of the windshield.

2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.

3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it.

4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper

blade until it snaps into place.

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Release Button

3 — Wiper Arm

544 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the

wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.

2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper

blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the

liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the

wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade

holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push

the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment, and the fluid level should be

checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-

shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).

Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for fur-

ther information.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 545

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in the

“Safety” section for further information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-

tact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control

device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-

mance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

546 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter

will not require maintenance. However, it is important to

keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst

operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition

switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature

controlled and can start at any time the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 547

WARNING! (Continued)

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had

time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,

flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the condenser.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead

to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system please contact your

local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains

visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and

flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to

MS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the

“Technical Data” section for further information.

548 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-

lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000

miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-

ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-

ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 549

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-

terial Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-

tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system, please contact your

local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as

possible.

550 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is

overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool

an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to

build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding

or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the

system is hot or under pressure.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek

emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground

spills immediately.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 551

Coolant Level

The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual

method for determining that the coolant level is ad-

equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the

engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-

tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.

As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-

tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a

month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, it should be added to the

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in

the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-

freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant

expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-

ing.

552 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure tested

for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion

protection of your engine which contains aluminum

components.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)

performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-

sions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also

reduce braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked

when performing under hood services, or immediately if

the “Brake Warning Light” is on.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 553

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the

brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked

when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level

may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to

both the brake system and the clutch release system. The

two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in

one system will not affect the other system. The manual

transmission clutch release system should not require

fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the

brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does

not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a

result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See

your local authorized dealer for service.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the

“Technical Data” section for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in the “Technical Data” section for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has

been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master

(Continued)

554 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the

air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-

longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall

clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids

may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of

clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-

sion.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for further

information.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 555

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid

level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a

point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom

of the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of

the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-

cant has become contaminated with water.

NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be

changed immediately.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Technical Data” for fluid specifications. It is important

to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level

using the recommended fluid.

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any

transmission; only the approved lubricant should be

used.

556 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Technical Data” for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission. Automatic

Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and

its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the

transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they

may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can

check your transmission fluid level using special service

tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-

tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have

the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-

hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe

transmission damage.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 557

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the

life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-

ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes

contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is

disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

558 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274

kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and

decals.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 559

CAUTION! (Continued)

• If the engine compartment is washed with an high

pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches

(20 centimeters) from filler surface.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly

with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.

560 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-

nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-

ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used

on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain

this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These

products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions

or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-

tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use

a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 561

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for

leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid

soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather

upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not

required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,

suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,

painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may

cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be

covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

562 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton

based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as

damage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and

less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows

equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which

minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use

protectants or other products which may cause undesir-

able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the

low glare surface.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 563

Instrument Panel Bezels

CAUTION!

When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-

hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.

Some air fresheners will damage the finish of

painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly

contact any surface.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or

abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a

clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the

vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

(Continued)

564 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

LIFTING A VEHICLE

In the case where it is necessary to lift the vehicle, go to

a your authorized dealer or service station.

The lifting points on the vehicle are marked on side skirts

with symbols (

see example shown).

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 565

Lifting Point Locations

566 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 567

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

568 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or

– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 569

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)

tire:

•

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•

LL = Light load tire or

•

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this

tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

570 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 571

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three

hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible

cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation

pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure

as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-

cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the

recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

572 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s

side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 573

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-

tion of this manual.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

574 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will

be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 575

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

576 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 577

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas

are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

578 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the

right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 579

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when they are under-

inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

580 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-

ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 581

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it

meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and

additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have

experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-

diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

582 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or

on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be

aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold

driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury

or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates

the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the origi-

nal equipment tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 583

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited

driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-

ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat

mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-

mation.

584 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in

“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or

for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-

ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 585

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be

replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for

further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the

tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce

tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment.

• Distance driven.

Tire Tread

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

586 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-

tenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for

the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-

ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of

this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 587

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two

rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a

wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

588 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may

result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body

clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard

against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as

recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

• Install on front tires only

• Due to limited clearance, the following traction de-

vices are recommended:

All Models:

• The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted with the use of

215/60R16 only. Front tires ONLY.

• Original Equipment 215/60R17, 215/65R17 and 225/

55R18 tire sizes are NOT chainable.

CAUTION!

• Use on front tires ONLY.

• Damage may result if tire chains or traction devices

are used with original equipment size tires.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)

between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable

handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 589

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-

tween tires and other suspension components, it is

important that only traction devices in good condi-

tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise

occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove

the damaged parts of the device before further use.

• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-

tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-

ment.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-

tions on the method of installation, operating

speed, and conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device manufac-

turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, handling,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road

590 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-

tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to

a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or

unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation

method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following

diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some

directional tires that must not be reversed.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 591

The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation

method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following

diagram.

CAUTION!

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-

pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference

on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause

damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation

schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a

month, observe the following precautions:

• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy

location the windows open slightly;

• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.

• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery

post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.

During storage check battery charge quarterly.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation

592 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE

• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical

system, check the battery charge every thirty days.

• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying pro-

tective waxes.

• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying

protective waxes.

• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper

blades and leave raised from the glass.

• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking

care not to damage the painted surface by dragging

across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which

will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on

the surface of the vehicle.

• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) is

higher than recommended on the tire placard and

check it periodically.

• Do not drain the engine cooling system.

• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two

weeks or more, run the at engine idling and for

approximately five minutes, with the air conditioning

system on and high fan speed. This will ensure a

proper lubrication of the system, thus minimizing the

possibility of damage to the compressor when the

vehicle is put back into operation.

CAUTION!

Before removal of the positive and negative terminals

to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition

switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.

When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals

to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

position and the drivers door is closed.

MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 593

TECHNICAL DATA

CONTENTS

䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ...............596

▫ Chassis Number ......................596

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS ......................597

▫ Torque Specifications ...................597

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................600

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

PARTS ..............................601

▫ Engine .............................601

▫ Chassis ............................602

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Chassis Number

The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a plate located

on the left front corner of the instrument panel cover,

which is visible from outside the car through the wind-

shield.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

596 TECHNICAL DATA

This number is also stamped on the floor of the passenger

compartment, near the right front seat.

A. Cover

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt Socket

Size

89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m) M12 x 1.25 17 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug

nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before

tightening.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

TECHNICAL DATA 597

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns

598 TECHNICAL DATA

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

TECHNICAL DATA 599

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4.0 Quarts 3.8 Liters

2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Cooling System *

1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

2.4L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/

150,000 Mile Formula)

6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

600 TECHNICAL DATA

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula

OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of

FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo

Engine

We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and

Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil –

2.4L Engine

We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the require-

ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.

Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection –

1.4L Turbo Engine

91 Octane Recommended, 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine

87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol

TECHNICAL DATA 601

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C Series Manual &

Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-

mission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct

fluid may affect the function or performance of your

transmission.

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use of synthetic lubricant SAE

75W-90 API GL5

Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use of synthetic lubricant SAE

75W-90 API GL5

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake

fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.

602 TECHNICAL DATA

MULTIMEDIA

CONTENTS

䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................605

䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................606

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................608

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............608

▫ Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 5.0 Settings ..................608

▫ Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 6.5AN Settings ................624

䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ...................640

䡵 USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL —

IF EQUIPPED .........................641

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......642

▫ Radio Operation ......................643

▫ Media Mode .........................643

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .644

▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........644

䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

QUICK TIPS ..........................646

▫ Introducing Uconnect...................646

▫ Get Started ..........................647

▫ Basic Voice Commands..................648

▫ Radio ..............................650

▫ Media..............................652

▫ Phone..............................653

▫ Voice Text Reply ......................655

▫ Navigation (6.5AN) ....................656

▫ Uconnect Access* (6.5A/6.5AN) ...........657

▫ Registration (6.5A/6.5AN) ...............658

▫ Mobile App (6.5AN) ...................659

▫ Voice Texting (6.5AN) ..................659

▫ Yelp (6.5AN) .........................660

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (6.5AN) .............661

▫ General Information ...................662

▫ Additional Information .................663

604 MULTIMEDIA

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be

equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These

networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-

mation. This information allows systems and features in

your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security

features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful

access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.

Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over

time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,

evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar

to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require

software updates to improve the usability and perfor-

mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of

unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-

tems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your

vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent

version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is

installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the

possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are

breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be im-

paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that

may result in an accident involving serious injury

or death.

(Continued)

MULTIMEDIA 605

WARNING! (Continued)

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into

your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media

of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-

cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it

may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to

be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-

havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized

dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding

software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize

the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners

should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-

update to learn about available Uconnect software

updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-

not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept

information and private communications without your

consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-

agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual

on the DVD.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on

the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on

the center of the instrument panel that allow you to

access and change the customer programmable features.

Many features can vary by vehicle.

606 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons

On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect 6.5AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And

Buttons On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

MULTIMEDIA 607

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the

Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In

addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on

the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through

menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the

center of the control knob one or more times to select or

change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and

back arrow buttons on the faceplate.

Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off

the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the

faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out

of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect touchscreen.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect

5.0 Settings

Push the + MORE button on the faceplate, then press the

“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the

settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system

allows you to access programmable features that may be

equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance,

Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Compass

Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Radio Setup, Restore

Settings and Clear Personal Data.

NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a

time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired

mode, press and release the preferred setting and make

608 MULTIMEDIA

your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press

the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back

button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or

press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of

the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow

buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to

toggle up or down through the available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition

in the “MAR/RUN” position.

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select the “Auto” or

“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press

and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the

touchscreen.

• Brightness

When in this display, you may select the overall screen

brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the

brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the

touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be-

tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

• Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple

languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-

menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-

tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button

on the touchscreen, then press the desired language

button on the touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA 609

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press

the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected.

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you

may select each unit of measure independently displayed

in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID). The following select-

able units of measure are listed below:

• US

Changes the EVIC/DID to US units of measure.

• Metric

Changes the EVIC/DID to Metric units of measure.

• Custom

• Distance

Select from: “mi” or “km.”

• Fuel Consumption

Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”

or “km/L.”

• Pressure

Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”

• Temperature

Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”

Clock & Date

After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Set Time and Format

When in this display, you may set the time and format

manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then

610 MULTIMEDIA

choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the

corresponding arrow above and below the current time

to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”

• Show Time Status

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the

touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”

• Set Date

When in this display, you may set the date manually.

Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press

the corresponding arrows above and below the current

date to adjust.

• Sync Time — If Equipped

When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.

Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and

select from “ON” or “OFF.”

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• ParkView Backup Camera — If Equipped

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the

vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay

turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines

will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK

or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

• ParkView Backup Camera — If Equipped

To change the setting, press the “On” or “Off” button

until it is highlighted.

MULTIMEDIA 611

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped

Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” button

on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or

OFF.

• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If

Equipped

When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid

lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image

to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected

back up path based on the steering wheel position. A

dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the

vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/

receiver.

• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines — If

Equipped

When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines

are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to

illustrate the width of the vehicle.

• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If

Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can

be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW+

is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of

a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when

you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction

time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving

experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a

possible collision when you are much closer to the

vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW+ status, press

and release the “Near” or “Far” button.

• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active

Braking — If Equipped

The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist

(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the

brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential

forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake

pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake

612 MULTIMEDIA

pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The

ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).

For further information, refer to “Forward Collision

Warning-Plus (FCW+) With Mitigation” in “Safety.”

• ParkSense — If Equipped

The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the

vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is

in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph

(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or

visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The

system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and

Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-

lease the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button.

Refer to “ParkSense” in “Starting And Operating” for

system function and operating information.

• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped

Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be se-

lected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if

equipped). The chime volume settings include

“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory de-

fault volume setting is MEDIUM.

• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped

Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be

selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if

equipped). The chime volume settings include

“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory de-

fault volume setting is MEDIUM.

• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the park assist system

will detect objects located behind the vehicle and

utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.

Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Starting

and Operating” for system function and operating

information.

MULTIMEDIA 613

• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which

the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential

lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to

provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning

zone start point.

For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning

(LDW)” in “Starting and Operating.”

• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the

steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.

The amount of directional torque the steering system can

apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane

departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”

For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-

ing (LDW)” in “Starting and Operating.”

• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature

can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind

Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When

this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)

system is activated and will only show a visual alert in

the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is

activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a

visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible

alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To

change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”

“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.

Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in

the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is

not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor

alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the

BSM not operating to specification.

614 MULTIMEDIA

• Electric Park Brake Service Mode

This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle

owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-

tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to

service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,

rotors, etc.).

For further information, refer to “Electric Park Brake

(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Headlight Sensitivity

When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight

Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels:

Level 1 = minimum sensitivity

Level 2 = medium sensitivity

Level 3 = maximum sensitivity

NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the exter-

nal light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with

a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier

than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensi-

tivity setting, press the “1,” “2” or “3” button on the

touchscreen to select your desired Headlight Sensitivity

level.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay

setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the

touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90

seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating

that the setting has been selected.

MULTIMEDIA 615

• Greeting Lights

When this feature is selected, it allows the greeting lights

to be turned On or Off. To change the Greeting Lights

setting, press the “On” or “Off” button on the touch-

screen to select your desired Greeting Light setting.

• Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-

ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High

Beams” button on the touchscreen, then select from “On”

or “Off.”

• Daytime Running Lights

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on

while the engine is running. To make your selection,

press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-

screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Cornering Lights

When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel

rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,

a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the

relevant side to improve visibility at night. To change the

Cornering Lights setting, press the “On” or “Off” button

on the touchscreen to select your desired Cornering

Lights setting.

• Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be

selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature

selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or

“Off.”

616 MULTIMEDIA

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available.

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door

Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.”

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock

on Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.”

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry

Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.”

• Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your

selection, press the “Horn w/Lock” button on the touch-

screen and select from ⬙Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press”

MULTIMEDIA 617

• Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped

Press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is se-

lected, the horn will sound when the remote start is

activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn

With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select

“ON” or “OFF.”

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s

door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make

your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the

touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

• Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock

When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will

unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button, you must push the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the

passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors

will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no

matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is

grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s

door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.

Touching the handle more than once will only result in

the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is

opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used

to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

618 MULTIMEDIA

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Engine Off Power Delay — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45

seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the

touchscreen.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-

screen to select your desired time interval.

• Radio Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a

preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.

To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN”

or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your

desired time interval.

MULTIMEDIA 619

Compass Settings — If Equipped

After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the

compass variance zone should be set for best results.

• Compass Variance

Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change

this setting. You will then be able to select a compass

variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone

map figure.

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.

Once properly set, the compass will automatically com-

pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide

the most accurate compass headings.

• Compass Calibration

Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter

calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the

“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or

more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or

Compass Variance Zone Map

620 MULTIMEDIA

metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch-

screen when the compass has been successfully cali-

brated.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the

instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and

Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is

located, and it can cause interference with the compass

sensor, and it may give false readings.

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your

finger up or down to change the setting as well as press

directly on the desired setting.

• Balance/Fade

When in this display you may adjust the Balance and

Fade settings.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.

MULTIMEDIA 621

• Loudness — If Equipped

Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To

make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the

touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.

• Auto-On Radio

The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run

or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.

To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on

the touchscreen, select “On,” “Off” or “Recall Last”.

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.

622 MULTIMEDIA

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to

their default settings. To restore the settings to their

default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A

pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to

reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or

“Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up

appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙

MULTIMEDIA 623

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on

the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data

including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove

personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”

button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure

you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to

Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,

a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect

6.5AN Settings

Press the Settings button to display the menu setting

screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to

access programmable features that may be equipped

such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,

Lights, Doors & Locks, engine Off Options, Audio,

Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings De-

faults, Clear Personal Data and System Information.

NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings

may vary.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired

mode, press and release the preferred setting and make

your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press

the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touch-

screen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up

or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will

allow you to toggle up or down through the available

settings.

624 MULTIMEDIA

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available:

• Display Mode

This feature will allow you to select one of the auto

display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-

lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display

Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause

the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control

even though the headlights are on.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

This feature will allow you to select the brightness with

the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the brightness with

the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple

languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-

menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-

tion system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button

on the touchscreen, then press the desired language

button on the touchscreen.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the

touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”

MULTIMEDIA 625

button on the touchscreen. Press the “On” or “Off”

button on the touchscreen to turn the Touchscreen Beep

ON or OFF.

Units

• Units

When in this display, you may select to have the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or Driver In-

formation Display (DID), odometer, and navigation sys-

tem (if equipped) changed between US and Metric units

of measure. Press “US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”

• Custom

When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of

measure independently displayed in the DID, and navi-

gation system. The following selectable units of measure

are listed below:

Distance — Select from: “MI” or “KM.”

Fuel Consumption — Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG”

(UK), L/100 km, or km/L.

Tire Pressure — Select from: “psi”, “kPa”, or “bar.”

Temperature — Select from: “°F” or “°C.”

Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-

sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the

touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.”

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may change the Show Com-

mand List settings. To change the Show Command List

626 MULTIMEDIA

settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the

touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or

“Never.”

Clock

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Show Time In Status Bar

This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the

digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the “On” or “Off” button on the

touchscreen.

• Sync Time With GPS

This feature will allow you to automatically have the

radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press

the “Sync Time with GPS” button on the touchscreen

then select from “On” or “Off.” When “On” is selected

you can only set the day, month and year. If ⬙Off⬙ is

selected you can set hour, minutes, format, show time in

status bar, day, month, and year.

• Set Day

This feature will allow you to set the day. To make your

selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the touchscreen

to adjust the day up or down.

• Set Month

This feature will allow you to set the month. To make

your selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the

touchscreen to adjust the month up or down.

• Set Year

This feature will allow you to set the year. To make your

selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the touchscreen

to adjust the year up or down.

MULTIMEDIA 627

• Set Hours

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync

Time with GPS “On” button must not be selected. To

make your selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the

touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down.

• Set Minutes

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The

Sync Time with GPS “On” button must not be selected.

To make your selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on

the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down.

• Time Format

This feature will allow you to select the time format

display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the

touchscreen. Press the “12hrs” or “24hrs” button on the

touchscreen.

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If

Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can

be set to Far, or Near. The default status of FCW+ is the

Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a

possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when

you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction

time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving

experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a

possible collision when you are much closer to the

vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW+ status, press

the “Fwd Collision Warning” button and select the

“Near” or “Far” button.

628 MULTIMEDIA

• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active

Braking — If Equipped

The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist

(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the

brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward

collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure

when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to

avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system

becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To change the Active

Braking status, press the “Active Braking” button and

select the “On” or “Off” button.

For further information, refer to “Forward Collision

Warning-Plus (FCW+) With Mitigation” in “Safety.”

• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which

the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential

lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to

provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning

zone start point. To change the LaneSense Warning

status, press the “LaneSense Warning” button and select

from the “Early,” “Med,” or “Late” buttons.

For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning

(LDW)” in “Starting And Operating.”

• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the

steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.

The amount of directional torque the steering system can

apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane

departure can be set at “Low,” “Med” or “High.” To

change the LaneSense Strength status, Press the “La-

neSense Strength” button and select from the “Low,”

“Medium” or “High” buttons.

For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-

ing (LDW)” in “Starting And Operating.”

MULTIMEDIA 629

• ParkSense — If Equipped

The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the

vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is

in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18

km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to

indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be

enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To

change the ParkSense status, press and release the “Off,”

“Sound Only,” or “Sound & Display” button. Refer to

“ParkSense” in “Starting And Operating” for system

function and operating information.

Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Starting And

Operating” for system function and operating informa-

tion.

• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped

Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected

from the EVIC or Uconnect System (if equipped). The

chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and

“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature

can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind

Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When

this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)

system is activated and will only show a visual alert in

the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is

activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a

visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible

alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To

change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Blind Spot

Alert” button and select from “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights

& Chimes.”

630 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in

the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is

not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor

alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the

BSM not operating to specification.

• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If

Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see

active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera

display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into

REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio

touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check

entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After

five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the

Active Guideline Status, press the “Active Guidelines”

button and select the “On” or “Off” button.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the

vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay

turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines

will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK

or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the

ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “MORE”

button on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the

touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”

button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup

camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the

ParkView Delay ON or OFF.

MULTIMEDIA 631

• Brakes

This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle

owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-

tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to

service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,

rotors, etc.). For further information, refer to “Service

Mode (Unlocking rear brake pads)” in “Maintaining And

Caring For Your Vehicle.”

• Auto Park Brake

This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle

owner to enable/disable auto insertion of the Electric

Park Brake. For further information, refer to “Auto Park

Brake” in “Starting And Operating.”

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

on the windshield. To make your selection, press the

“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select

“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Electric Park Brake Service Mode

This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle

owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-

tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to

service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,

rotors, etc.).

For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake

(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”

632 MULTIMEDIA

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Headlight Sensitivity

When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight

Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels:

Level 1 = minimum sensitivity

Level 2 = medium sensitivity

Level 3 = maximum sensitivity

NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the exter-

nal light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with

a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier

than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensi-

tivity setting, press the “1,” “2” or “3” button on the

touchscreen to select your desired Headlight Sensitivity

level.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay

setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the

touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90

seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating

that the setting has been selected.

• Greeting Lights

When this feature is selected, it allows the greeting lights

to be turned On or Off. To change the Greeting Lights

setting, press the “On” or “Off” button on the touch-

screen to select your desired Greeting Light setting.

MULTIMEDIA 633

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To

make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”

button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”

• Daytime Running Lights

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on

while the engine is running. To make your selection,

press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-

screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Cornering Lights

When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel

rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,

a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the

relevant side to improve visibility at night. To change the

Cornering Lights setting, press the “On” or “Off” button

on the touchscreen to select your desired Cornering

Lights setting.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be

selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature

selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

with Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On”

or “Off.”

• Steering Directed Headlights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative

to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make

your selection, press the “Steering Directed Headlights”

button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.”

634 MULTIMEDIA

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make

your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-

ton on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.”

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph

(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto

Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or

“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-

ting has been selected.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Lock On

Exit” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or

“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-

ting has been selected.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, press

the “Flash Headlights With Lock” button on the touch-

screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

MULTIMEDIA 635

• Sound Horn With Remote Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the door locks are activated. To make your selection,

press the “Sound Horn With Remote Lock” button on the

touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Sound Horn With Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the Remote Start is activated. To make your selection,

press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the

touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Remote Door Unlock

This feature will allow you to program your remote door

locks to open “All” or only the “Driver” with the first

push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or

grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To make your

selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock” button on the

touchscreen and choose from “All” or “Driver.”

NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) transmitter

will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all

doors.

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles

door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make

your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the

touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Memory Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory

Linked To Key Fob” button on the touchscreen and select

from “On” or “Off.”

636 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set

to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

is used to unlock the door.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Radio Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a

preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.

To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN”

or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your

desired time interval.

• Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-

screen to select your desired time interval.

• Engine Off Power Delay — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45

seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the

touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA 637

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Balance/Fade

When in this display you may adjust the Balance and

Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the

arrows to adjust, or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the

center.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your

finger up or down to change the setting as well as press

directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or ”3” button on the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select On or Off.

• Loudness — If Equipped

Press the “On” button to activate Loudness. Press “Off”

to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is On, the

loudness setting increases dynamic range of audio at

higher volumes.

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

638 MULTIMEDIA

To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”

button on the touchscreen, select any point on the scale

between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

• Auto-On Radio

The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run

or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.

To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on

the touchscreen, select “On,” “Off” or “Recall Last”.

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which mobile phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system.

• Paired Audio Sources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system.

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

MULTIMEDIA 639

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings Defaults

After pressing the “Restore Settings Defaults” button on

the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,

Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. Once in the

desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and

make your selection.

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data

including Bluetooth devices and presets. To Clear Per-

sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the

touchscreen.

UCONNECT RADIOS

For detailed information about your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or

6.5AN radio, refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.

640 MULTIMEDIA

USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows an external device to be plugged into

the USB port or AUX Jack.

Located below the heating ventilation and air condition-

ing controls is the front USB port.

Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for external

USB support capability.

Front USB Port And AUX Jack

1 — USB Port

2 — AUX/Cable Jack

MULTIMEDIA 641

Center Console USB Port

Located in the center console is a second USB port.

NOTE: Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB

port may be charge only, or media file capable.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located at the rear

of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access

the switches.

Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — If Equipped

Remote Sound System Controls

(Back View Of Steering Wheel)

642 MULTIMEDIA

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and

mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker

switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom

of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch

between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/

AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/

enter an item while scrolling through menu.

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in

each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch

will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-

grammed in the radio preset button.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the selected media (AUX/USB, Bluetooth).

Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the

beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the

previous track if it is within eight seconds after the

current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the

second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

MULTIMEDIA 643

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES

Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is

not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does

not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during mobile device operation when

not using Uconnect (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio

is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a

manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human

body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines

found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-

mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific

community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless

radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy

emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-

ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,

the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some

situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If

you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask

for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

644 MULTIMEDIA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician

for help.

MULTIMEDIA 645

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-

ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and

tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or

6.5AN system.

Uconnect 3.0

Uconnect 5.0

646 MULTIMEDIA

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your

voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing

instructions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-

versations are examples of noise that may impact

recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while

facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned

on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after

the beep, then say your Voice Command.

Uconnect 6.5AN

MULTIMEDIA 647

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts

by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any

point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session.

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-

ceive A Text

2 — Push To Begin Radio, Navigation, Or Media functions

3 — Push To End Call

648 MULTIMEDIA

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice

recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-

screen.

Uconnect 3.0

Uconnect 5.0

MULTIMEDIA 649

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-

tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM.

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1.

Uconnect 6.5AN

650 MULTIMEDIA

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or

want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button

and say “Help.” The system will provide you with

a list of commands.

Uconnect 5.0 Radio

Uconnect 6.5AN Radio

MULTIMEDIA 651

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth and

Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only

available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote

CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands and follow the prompts to

switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth.

• Change source to iPod.

• Change source to USB.

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical.

TIP: For the Uconnect 5.0 and 6.5AN systems, press the

Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music

on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command must

match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre

information is displayed.

Uconnect 5.0 Media

652 MULTIMEDIA

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy

with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-

nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check

UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and

pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button

. After the beep, say one of

the following commandsѧ

• Call John Smith.

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts.

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number).

• Call back (call previous incoming phone number).

Uconnect 6.5AN Media

MULTIMEDIA 653

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone

button

and say “Call,” then pronounce the name

exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a

contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say

“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect 5.0 Phone

Uconnect 6.5AN Phone

654 MULTIMEDIA

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push

the Phone button

and say “Listen.” (Must have

compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push

the Phone button

. After the beep, say: “Reply.”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat

one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system

prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.

No.

Start without

me.

I’ll be Late.

Okay. Where are you? I will be

minutes late.

Call me.

Are you there

yet?

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

I’ll call you

later.

I need

directions.

See you in

<number> of

minutes.

I’m on my way.

Can’t talk right

now.

I’m lost. Thanks.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-

tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-

tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-

ports reading incoming text messages only.

MULTIMEDIA 655

Navigation (6.5AN)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and

become more productive when you know exactly how to

get to where you want to go.

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

. After

the beep, say:

• For the 6.5AN Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to

800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button

. After

the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect 6.5AN Navigation

656 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect Access* (6.5A/6.5AN)

WARNING!

Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and

assist will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/

data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-

rized by the subscriber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take

advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next

section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,

push the MORE button below the 6.5-inch touchscreen to

get started. Detailed registration instructions can be

found on the next page.

*Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles

purchased within the continental United States, Alaska

and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is

available; see coverage map for details.

9-1-1 Call

Security Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn and Lights

Yelp Search

Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call

Wi-Fi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

MULTIMEDIA 657

Registration (6.5A/6.5AN)

1. Push the ASSIST button located in the overhead

console.

2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.

3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your

vehicle and handle all of the details.

Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,

press the “Apps

” button on the touchscreen to

“Register By Web” to complete the process using your

wireless device or computer.

For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.

658 MULTIMEDIA

Mobile App (6.5AN)

You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-

mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.

To link your internet radio accounts:

1. Download the Uconnect Access App from the App

Store or Google Play.

2. Open the app and tap Create Account.

3. Enter your email address and click Next.

4. Once your email address is verified, enter a password

and full name to create an account.

NOTE: Once you download the App to your compatible

mobile device, you will also be able to start your vehicle

and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere. For

further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.

Voice Texting (6.5AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button

. After

the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-

sage to John Smith.”

Mobile App

MULTIMEDIA 659

2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the

message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to

process your message.

3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and

provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or

hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect

what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy

with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”

You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a

compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice

to send a personalized text message.

TIP:

• Not compatible with iPhone.

• Messages are limited to 140 characters.

• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be

illuminated to use the feature.

Yelp (6.5AN)

Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your

voice to search for the most popular places or things

around you.

1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.

2. Press the “Apps” button then the “All Apps” button

on the touchscreen.

3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.

4. Once the YELP home screen appears, push the VR

button

, then say: “YELP search.”

5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell

Uconnect the place or business that you’d like

Uconnect to find.

660 MULTIMEDIA

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the

results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or

Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

SiriusXM Travel Link (6.5AN)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,

check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?

SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a

wealth of information right to your Uconnect 6.5AN

system.

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Show fuel prices.

• Show 5 - day weather forecast.

• Show extended weather.

Yelp

MULTIMEDIA 661

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-

mand.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE:

•

The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC

and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-

fications were met.

SiriusXM Travel Link

662 MULTIMEDIA

Additional Information

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a

trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks

and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,

Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered

trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7

days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca

• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET

• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

• Sun., Closed

Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please

have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.

MULTIMEDIA 663

INDEX

About Your Brakes ........................239

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................241

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............549

Adding Fuel .............................405

Adding Washer Fluid ......................545

Additives, Fuel ...........................403

AirBag................................274

Advance Front Air Bag ................274, 276

Air Bag Operation .......................277

Air Bag Warning Light ...................287

Driver Knee Air Bag .....................279

Event Data Recorder (EDR) ................290

FrontAirBag ..........................274

If A Deployment Occurs ..................284

Knee Impact Bolsters .....................278

Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............289

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...........289

Side Air Bags ..........................279

Transporting Pets .......................312

Air Bag Deployment .......................274

Air Bag Light .....................187, 287, 314

Air Bag Maintenance.......................289

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .539

Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........122, 135, 540

Air Conditioning ......................119,132

Air Conditioning Controls ...................119

Air Conditioning Filter .....................541

Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............540, 541

Air Conditioning System .................119,540

Air Pressure, Tires.........................580

Air Recirculation ......................122, 131

Alarm

Arm The System ........................52

Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................51, 190

Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................51

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............548, 600

Disposal

..............................551

666 INDEX

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................241

Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................208

Appearance Care .........................558

Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............51

Assist, Hill Start ..........................246

Audio Systems (Radio) .....................640

Auto Down Power Windows .................115

Automatic Headlights .......................98

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

SYNC Temperature Button .................131

Automatic Transmission ..............339, 556, 558

Adding Fluid .......................558, 602

Fluid And Filter Changes ..................558

Fluid Change ..........................558

Fluid Level Check .......................557

Fluid Type .........................556, 602

Special Additives .......................557

Auto Up Power Windows ...................115

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........166

Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................166

Axle Fluid ..............................602

Axle Lubrication ..........................602

Battery .............................192, 539

Charging System Light ...................192

Belts, Seat...............................314

Blind Spot Monitoring.......................87

Body Mechanism Lubrication .................542

B-Pillar Location ..........................573

Brake Assist System .......................244

Brake Fluid .............................602

Brakes ..............................239, 553

Brake System .........................239, 553

Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................241

Fluid Check ...........................602

Master Cylinder ........................553

Warning Light .........................188

Brightness, Interior Lights ...................107

INDEX 667

Bulbs, Light .............................316

Camera, Rear ............................386

Capacities, Fluid ..........................600

Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine) ...........................537

Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............313, 405

Car Washes .............................559

Certification Label.........................409

Changing A Flat Tire....................483, 565

Chart, Tire Sizing .........................568

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .522

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............312

Checks, Safety ...........................312

Child Restraint ...........................291

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ..........................296

Child Restraints ........................291

Child Seat Installation ....................309

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......305

Infants And Child Restraints ...............294

Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .304

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle

Seat Belt ..............................306

LATCH Positions .......................299

Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............302

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......298

Older Children And Child Restraints .........294

Seating Positions ........................297

Child Safety Locks .........................65

Clean Air Gasoline ........................401

Cleaning

Wheels ...............................560

Windshield Wiper Blades ..................542

Climate Control ..........................117

Automatic ..................123, 127, 128, 134

Manual ..............................117

Clutch .................................553

668 INDEX

Clutch Fluid .............................553

Coin Holder .............................171

Cold Weather Operation ....................323

Connector

UCI.................................641

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........641

Console ................................171

Console, Floor ...........................171

Contract, Service...........................13

Cooling System...........................547

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............549

Coolant Capacity .......................600

Coolant Level ......................548, 552

Disposal Of Used Coolant .................551

Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................548

Inspection ............................552

Points To Remember ..................551, 552

Pressure Cap ..........................551

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......548, 600, 601

Corrosion Protection .......................558

Cruise Light..........................212, 214

Cupholders .............................172

Customer Assistance ........................11

Customer Programmable Features .............608

Data Recorder, Event.......................290

Daytime Running Lights .....................98

Dealer Service............................523

Defroster, Rear Window ..............111,121, 134

Defroster, Windshield ................120, 133, 314

Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................101

Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................514

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................551

Door Ajar ...........................195, 196

Door Ajar Light .......................195, 196

Door Locks

Door Locks ............................54

INDEX 669

KeyFob...............................54

Remote ...............................54

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................54

Driver Information Display (DID)

Instrument Cluster ......................221

Oil Change ............................221

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .......................67

Driving ................................411

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........166

Electric Park Brake ........................327

Electric Parking Brake ......................327

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............245

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........351

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...........240, 250

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........193

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......386

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .216

Emergency, In Case Of

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................435

Jacking ...........................483, 565

Jump Starting ..........................499

Overheating ...........................506

Tow Hooks ............................516

Towing ..............................514

Emission Control System Maintenance ..........522

Engine

Air Cleaner ...........................539

Break-In Recommendations ................326

Checking Oil Level ......................535

Compartment ..........................533

Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................601

Cooling ..............................547

Exhaust Gas Caution .................313, 405

Fails To Start ..........................322

Flooded, Starting .......................322

Fuel Requirements ......................400

670 INDEX

Jump Starting ..........................499

Oil...........................535, 600, 601

Oil Filler Cap ..........................537

Oil Filter .............................538

Oil Selection .......................537, 600

Overheating ...........................506

Starting ..............................321

Engine Oil Viscosity .......................537

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................537

Ethanol ................................402

Event Data Recorder .......................290

Exhaust Gas Caution ...................313, 405

Exhaust System .......................313, 545

Exterior Lighting ..........................97

Exterior Lights.........................97, 316

Filters

Air Cleaner ...........................539

Air Conditioning .......................541

Engine Oil .........................538, 601

Engine Oil Disposal .....................538

Flashers

Hazard Warning ........................435

Turn Signal .....................101, 211, 316

Flash-To-Pass ............................100

Flooded Engine Starting ....................322

Floor Console ............................171

Fluid, Brake .............................602

Fluid Capacities ..........................600

Fluid Leaks .............................316

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........601

Fog Lights ...............................99

Forward Collision Warning ..................360

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................512

Fuel...................................400

Adding ..............................405

Additives .............................403

Clean Air .............................401

INDEX 671

Ethanol ..............................402

Gasoline ..............................400

Light ................................206

Materials Added ........................403

Methanol .............................402

Octane Rating ......................400, 601

Requirements ..........................400

Specifications ..........................601

Tank Capacity ..........................600

Gasoline, Clean Air ........................401

Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................400

Gasoline, Reformulated .....................401

Gear Ranges .............................336

Gear Select Lever Override ..................507

General Information .......................370

General Maintenance.......................535

Glass Cleaning ...........................563

Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................418

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................417

GVWR .................................409

Hazard Warning Flasher ....................435

Headlights

Automatic .............................98

Cleaning .............................563

Delay ................................99

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........101

Lights On Reminder ......................99

Passing ..............................100

Switch ................................97

Time Delay ............................99

Head Restraints ...........................78

Head Rests ..............................78

Heated Mirrors............................87

Heater .................................119

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .101

Hill Descent Control .......................247

672 INDEX

Hill Descent Control Indicator ................247

Hill Start Assist...........................246

Hitches

Trailer Towing .........................420

Holder, Coin.............................171

Holder, Cup .............................172

Hood Prop ..............................150

Hood Release ............................150

Ignition

Key..................................41

Ignition Key Removal ......................509

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................50

Inside Rearview Mirror...................83, 435

Instrument Cluster ...........179, 191, 194, 207, 211

Instrument Cluster ......................221

Instrument Panel Cover .....................563

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............564

Interior And Instrument Lights................102

Interior Appearance Care....................562

Interior Lights ...........................102

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............108

Introduction ..............................4

Inverter, Power ...........................168

Jacking Instructions........................486

Jack Location ............................484

Jack Operation.....................483, 486, 565

Jump Starting ............................499

Key Fob

Arm The Alarm .........................52

Keyless Entry ...........................58

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........40

Programming Additional Transmitters .........40

Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................58

Enter The Trunk .........................58

KeyFob...............................58

INDEX 673

Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ...............58, 635

Passive Entry ...........................58

Passive Entry Programming .............58, 635

Remote Control .........................58

Unlock From The Driver’s Side ..............58

Unlock From The Passenger Side .............58

Unlock Liftgate .........................635

Keyless Entry System .......................31

Key, Replacement ..........................40

Keys.................................31, 41

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................50

Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............101

LaneSense ..............................370

Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................261

Latches ................................316

Lead Free Gasoline ........................400

Leaks, Fluid .............................316

Life Of Tires .............................586

Liftgate ................................152

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............111

Light Bulbs..............................316

Lights .................................316

AirBag........................187, 287, 314

Automatic Headlights .....................98

Brake Assist Warning ....................255

Brake Warning .........................188

Cruise ............................212, 214

Daytime Running ........................98

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................101

Engine Temperature Warning ...............194

Exterior ..............................316

Fog..................................99

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................435

Headlights .............................97

Headlights On Reminder ...................99

Headlight Switch ........................97

High Beam ............................101

674 INDEX

High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............101

Hill Descent Control Indicator ..............247

Instrument Cluster .......................97

Intensity Control ........................107

Interior ..............................102

Lights On Reminder ......................99

Low Fuel .............................206

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........204

Park .................................211

Passing ..............................100

Seat Belt Reminder ......................186

Security Alarm .........................190

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........199, 389

Traction Control ........................255

Turn Signal .....................101, 211, 316

Vanity Mirror ..........................106

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .194, 211

Loading Vehicle ..........................409

Tires ................................573

Locks ..................................54

Child Protection .........................65

Door .................................54

Low Tire Pressure System ...................389

Lubrication, Body .........................542

Luggage Carrier ..........................174

Lug Nuts ...............................597

Maintenance Free Battery....................539

Maintenance, General ......................535

Maintenance Procedures ....................535

Maintenance Schedule ......................524

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .204, 522

Manual, Service ...........................16

Manual Transmission ...................334, 555

Fluid Level Check .......................556

Frequency Of Fluid Change ................556

Lubricant Selection ......................555

Shift Speeds ...........................336

INDEX 675

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................553

Methanol ...............................402

Mirrors

Heated ...............................87

Outside ...............................85

Rearview ..........................83, 435

Vanity ...............................106

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................389

MTBE/ETBE ............................402

New Vehicle Break-In Period .................326

Occupant Restraints .......................258

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............400, 601

Oil, Engine ..........................535, 601

Capacity .............................600

Change Interval ........................536

Checking .............................535

Disposal ..............................538

Filter .............................538, 601

Filter Disposal .........................538

Materials Added To ......................538

Pressure Warning Light ...................190

Recommendation ....................537, 600

Viscosity ..........................537, 600

Oil Filter, Change .........................538

Oil Filter, Selection ........................538

Oil Pressure Light .........................190

Onboard Diagnostic System ..................215

Operating Precautions ......................215

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5

Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................85

Overheating, Engine .......................506

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........5,16

Paint Care ..............................558

Parking Brake............................327

676 INDEX

ParkSense System, Rear .....................381

Pets ...................................312

Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........574

Power

Brakes ...............................239

Inverter ..............................168

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........166

Windows .............................114

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...............270

Preparation For Jacking .....................486

Pretensioners

Seat Belts .............................271

Radial Ply Tires ..........................582

Radio Frequency

General Information ............33, 45, 49, 51, 64

Radio Operation ..........................644

Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................109

Rear Camera ............................386

Rear Cross Path ...........................93

Rear ParkSense System .....................381

Rearview Mirrors ..........................83

Rear Window Defroster .....................111

Rear Wiper/Washer ........................111

Recorder, Event Data.......................290

Recreational Towing .......................430

Reformulated Gasoline .....................401

Refrigerant ..............................541

Reminder, Lights On........................99

Reminder, Seat Belt ........................260

Remote Control

Starting System .........................45

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................31

Arm The Alarm .........................52

Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................58

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........40

Programming Additional Transmitters .........40

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........642

INDEX 677

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode ...................48

Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .....48

Uconnect Settings ........................48

Remote Starting System......................45

Replacement Keys .........................40

Replacement Parts.........................523

Replacement Tires .........................587

Reporting Safety Defects .....................15

Restraint, Head ...........................78

Restraints, Child ..........................291

Restraints, Occupant .......................258

Roll Over Warning ..........................7

Roof Type Carrier .........................174

Rotation, Tires ...........................590

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................314

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................316

Safety Defects, Reporting.....................15

Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................313

Safety Information, Tire .....................567

Safety Tips ..............................312

Schedule, Maintenance .....................524

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .....267

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..........271

Energy Management Feature ...............271

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...............264

Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................261

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ..............266

Pregnant Women .......................270

Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................271

Seat Belt Reminder ......................260

Seat Belt System ........................258

Seat Belt Maintenance ......................564

Seat Belt Reminder ........................260

Seat Belts............................259, 314

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................267

678 INDEX

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........267

Child Restraint .........................291

Front Seat ......................259, 261, 264

Inspection ............................314

Operating Instructions ....................264

Pregnant Women .......................270

Pretensioners ..........................271

Rear Seat .............................261

Reminder .............................186

Untwisting Procedure ....................266

Seats ...................................66

Adjustment ..........................66, 67

Head Restraints .........................78

Seatback Release .........................67

Tilting ................................67

Security Alarm.........................51, 190

Arm The System ........................52

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............601

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................50

Sentry Key Replacement .....................40

Service Assistance ..........................11

Service Contract ...........................13

Service Manuals ...........................16

Shifting

Manual Transmission ....................334

Shift Lever Override .......................507

Shoulder Belts ...........................261

Side View Mirror Adjustment .................85

Signals, Turn ......................101, 211, 316

Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................589

Snow Tires ..............................583

Spark Plugs .............................601

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) .........................601

Oil..................................601

Speed Control (Cruise Control)................351

Starting..............................45, 321

Cold Weather ..........................323

INDEX 679

Engine Fails To Start .....................322

Remote ...............................45

Starting And Operating .....................321

Starting Procedures ........................321

Steering

Tilt Column ............................81

Wheel, Heated ..........................82

Wheel, Tilt .............................81

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............642

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .642

Stuck, Freeing............................512

Sun Visor Extension .......................164

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag.........274

Sway Control, Trailer ...................256, 419

System, Remote Starting .....................45

Telescoping Steering Column ..................81

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........129

Tilt Steering Column ........................81

Time Delay, Headlight.......................99

Tip Start................................322

Tire And Loading Information Placard .......573, 574

Tire Markings ............................567

Tires.............................17, 316, 578

Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................586

Air Pressure ...........................578

Chains ...............................589

Changing .........................483, 565

General Information .....................578

High Speed ...........................581

Inflation Pressures .......................580

Jacking ...........................483, 565

Life Of Tires ...........................586

Load Capacity ......................573, 574

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............389

Pressure Warning Light ...................199

Quality Grading .........................17

Radial ...............................582

680 INDEX

Replacement ...........................587

Rotation ..............................590

Safety ............................567, 578

Sizes ................................568

Snow Tires ............................583

Spinning .............................585

Trailer Towing .........................424

Tread Wear Indicators ....................586

Tire Safety Information .....................567

Tire Service Kit ...........................495

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................422

Tow Hooks, Emergency .....................516

Towing ................................417

Disabled Vehicle ........................514

Guide ...............................421

Recreational ...........................430

Weight ...............................421

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................256

Trailer Towing ...........................417

Cooling System Tips .....................429

Hitches ..............................420

Minimum Requirements ..................423

Trailer And Tongue Weight ................422

Wiring ...............................426

Trailer Towing Guide.......................421

Trailer Weight............................421

Transfer Case

Fluid ................................602

Transmission

Automatic .........................339, 556

Fluid ................................602

Manual ..............................334

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .40

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........31

Transporting Pets .........................312

Tread Wear Indicators ......................586

Turn Signals

..........................101, 211

INDEX 681

UCI Connector ...........................641

Uconnect

Customer Programmable Features ............48

Uconnect Settings ........................48

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition

General Information .....................662

Uconnect Settings ..........................33

Customer Programmable Features ...........635

Passive Entry Programming ................635

Uconnect Settings .......................635

Uconnect Voice Command ...................646

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................17

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .641

Unleaded Gasoline ........................400

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............266

Vanity Mirrors ...........................106

Vehicle Loading .......................409, 574

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........51

Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................537

Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................435

Warning, Roll Over .........................7

Warnings And Cautions ......................7

Warranty Information .......................15

Washer

Adding Fluid ..........................545

Washing Vehicle ..........................559

Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................560

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................560

Wind Buffeting ...........................117

Windows ...............................114

Power ...............................114

Windshield Defroster ...................120, 314

Windshield Wiper Blades....................542

Wiper Blade Replacement ...................542

Wipers, Intermittent .......................108

682 INDEX

Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................109

Wrecker Towing ..........................514

INDEX 683

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

Renegade

OWNER’S MANUAL

2016 Renegade

First Edition Rev 1

Printed in U.S.A.

16BU-126-AA

Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

2016

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS

Hebben de breedstralers ook een functie als richtingaanwijzers bij verandering van richting ? Gesteld op 3-3-2018 om 17:17
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
- Op het moment dat u de richting aanwijzer aan doet gaat ook de breedstraler aan de bewuste zijde branden. Functie? Ik merk er niets van. Geantwoord op 21-11-2018 om 07:18
  Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden
geef de Nederlandse handleiding van de Jeep Renegade Longitude Gesteld op 19-7-2016 om 16:36
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
- Die zou ik ook moeten hebben Nederlands aub Geantwoord op 4-11-2016 om 12:28
  Waardeer dit antwoord (2) Misbruik melden
Vraagje heb jij die ondertussen al gehad ??? Geantwoord op 4-11-2016 om 12:47
Waardeer dit antwoord (5) Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

lees eerst de handleiding door;
controleer of uw vraag al eerder door iemand anders is gesteld;
probeer uw vraag zo duidelijk mogelijk te stellen;
heeft u een probleem en al geprobeerd om dit op te lossen, vermeld dit erbij aub;
heeft u een oplossing gekregen van een bezoeker dan horen wij dat graag in dit forum;
wilt u een reactie geven op een vraag of antwoord, gebruik dan niet dit formulier maar klik op de knop 'reageer op deze vraag';
uw vraag wordt direct op de website gezet; vermijd daarom persoonlijke gegevens in te vullen;

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Jeep Renegade - 2016 bij:

nieuwe vragen en antwoorden
nieuwe handleidingen

U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Jeep Renegade - 2016 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 7,44 mb groot.

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Jeep Renegade - 2016

Jeep Renegade - 2016 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 597 pagina's

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.

Jeep Renegade - 2016 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Jeep Renegade - 2016

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info

Jeep Renegade - 2016 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Jeep Renegade - 2016

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info